Table of contents
  1. Visualizations
    1. Table
      1. What is a Table?
      2. How to Use the Table
      3. Images in Tables
      4. Virtual Columns
      5. Table Properties
        1. Table Properties
        2. Table Properties – General
        3. Table Properties – Data
        4. Table Properties – Appearance
        5. Table Properties – Fonts
        6. Table Properties – Columns
        7. Table Properties – Virtual Columns
        8. Table Properties – Colors
        9. Table Properties – Sorting
        10. Table Properties – Legend
        11. Details on Column Width
    2. Cross Table
      1. What is a Cross Table?
      2. How to Use the Cross Table
      3. Formatting in the Cross Table
      4. Cross Table Properties
        1. Cross Table Properties
        2. Cross Table Properties – General
        3. Cross Table Properties – Data
        4. Cross Table Properties – Appearance
        5. Cross Table Properties – Column Subtotals
        6. Cross Table Properties – Formatting
        7. Cross Table Properties – Fonts
        8. Cross Table Properties – Axes
        9. Cross Table Properties – Colors
        10. Cross Table Properties – Sorting
        11. Cross Table Properties – Legend
    3. Graphical Table
      1. What is a Graphical Table?
      2. How to Use the Graphical Table
      3. Graphical Table Properties
        1. Graphical Table Properties
        2. Graphical Table Properties – General
        3. Graphical Table Properties – Data
        4. Graphical Table Properties – Appearance
        5. Graphical Table Properties – Fonts
        6. Graphical Table Properties – Axes
        7. Graphical Table Properties – Legend
      4. Sparkline
        1. What are Sparklines?
        2. How to Use Sparklines
        3. Sparkline Settings
        4. Sparkline Settings – General
        5. Sparkline Settings – Data
        6. Sparkline Settings – Appearance
        7. Sparkline Settings – Formatting
        8. Sparkline Settings – Axes
        9. Sparkline Settings – Actions
        10. Sparkline Settings – Tooltip
      5. Calculated Value
        1. What are Calculated Values?
        2. How to Use Calculated Values
        3. Calculated Value Settings
        4. Calculated Value Settings – General
        5. Calculated Value Settings – Data
        6. Calculated Value Settings – Formatting
        7. Calculated Value Settings – Values
        8. Calculated Value Settings – Actions
        9. Calculated Value Settings – Tooltip
        10. Details on Add/Edit Rule
      6. Icon
        1. What are Icons?
        2. How to Use Icons
        3. Icon Settings
        4. Icon Settings – General
        5. Icon Settings – Data
        6. Icon Settings – Icons
        7. Icon Settings – Actions
        8. Icon Settings – Tooltip
        9. Details on Add/Edit Rule
      7. Bullet Graph
        1. What are Bullet Graphs?
        2. How to Use Bullet Graphs
        3. Bullet Graph Settings
        4. Bullet Graph Settings – General
        5. Bullet Graph Settings – Data
        6. Bullet Graph Settings – Formatting
        7. Bullet Graph Settings – Bullet Graphs
        8. Bullet Graph Settings – Color Ranges
        9. Bullet Graph Settings – Actions
        10. Bullet Graph Settings – Tooltip
    4. Bar Chart
      1. What is a Bar Chart?
      2. How to Use the Bar Chart
      3. Bar Chart Properties
        1. Bar Chart Properties
        2. Bar Chart Properties – General
        3. Bar Chart Properties – Data
        4. Bar Chart Properties – Appearance
        5. Bar Chart Properties – Formatting
        6. Bar Chart Properties – Fonts
        7. Bar Chart Properties – Category Axis
        8. Bar Chart Properties – Value Axis
        9. Bar Chart Properties – Colors
        10. Bar Chart Properties – Labels
        11. Bar Chart Properties – Tooltip
        12. Bar Chart Properties – Legend
        13. Bar Chart Properties – Trellis
        14. Bar Chart Properties – Lines & Curves
        15. Bar Chart Properties – Error Bars
    5. Line Chart
      1. What is a Line Chart?
      2. How to Use the Line Chart
      3. Line Chart Properties
        1. Line Chart Properties
        2. Line Chart Properties – General
        3. Line Chart Properties – Data
        4. Line Chart Properties – Appearance
        5. Line Chart Properties – Formatting
        6. Line Chart Properties – Fonts
        7. Line Chart Properties – X-axis
        8. Line Chart Properties – Y-axis
        9. Line Chart Properties – Line By
        10. Line Chart Properties – Colors
        11. Line Chart Properties – Labels
        12. Line Chart Properties – Tooltip
        13. Line Chart Properties – Legend
        14. Line Chart Properties – Trellis
        15. Line Chart Properties – Lines & Curves
        16. Line Chart Properties – Error Bars
    6. Combination Chart
      1. What is a Combination Chart?
      2. How to Use the Combination Chart
      3. Combination Chart Properties
        1. Combination Chart Properties
        2. Combination Chart Properties – General
        3. Combination Chart Properties – Data
        4. Combination Chart Properties – Appearance
        5. Combination Chart Properties – Formatting
        6. Combination Chart Properties – Fonts
        7. Combination Chart Properties – X-axis
        8. Combination Chart Properties – Y-axis
        9. Combination Chart Properties – Series
        10. Combination Chart Properties – Labels
        11. Combination Chart Properties – Tooltip
        12. Combination Chart Properties – Legend
        13. Combination Chart Properties – Trellis
        14. Combination Chart Properties – Lines & Curves
    7. Pie Chart
      1. What is a Pie Chart?
      2. How to Use the Pie Chart
      3. Pie Chart Properties
        1. Pie Chart Properties
        2. Pie Chart Properties – General
        3. Pie Chart Properties – Data
        4. Pie Chart Properties – Appearance
        5. Pie Chart Properties – Fonts
        6. Pie Chart Properties – Colors
        7. Pie Chart Properties – Size
        8. Pie Chart Properties – Labels
        9. Pie Chart Properties – Tooltip
        10. Pie Chart Properties – Legend
        11. Pie Chart Properties – Trellis
    8. Scatter Plot
      1. What is a Scatter Plot?
      2. How to Use the Scatter Plot
      3. Scatter Plot Properties
        1. Scatter Plot Properties
        2. Scatter Plot Properties – General
        3. Scatter Plot Properties – Data
        4. Scatter Plot Properties – Appearance
        5. Scatter Plot Properties – Formatting
        6. Scatter Plot Properties – Fonts
        7. Scatter Plot Properties – X-axis
        8. Scatter Plot Properties – Y-axis
        9. Scatter Plot Properties – Colors
        10. Scatter Plot Properties – Size
        11. Scatter Plot Properties – Shape
        12. Scatter Plot Properties – Labels
        13. Scatter Plot Properties – Tooltip
        14. Scatter Plot Properties – Legend
        15. Scatter Plot Properties – Trellis
        16. Scatter Plot Properties – Line Connection
        17. Scatter Plot Properties – Marker By
        18. Scatter Plot Properties – Lines & Curves
        19. Scatter Plot Properties – Error Bars
    9. 3D Scatter Plot
      1. What is a 3D Scatter Plot?
      2. How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot
      3. 3D Scatter Plot Properties
        1. 3D Scatter Plot Properties
        2. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – General
        3. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Data
        4. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Appearance
        5. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Formatting
        6. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Fonts
        7. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – X-axis
        8. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Y-axis
        9. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Z-axis
        10. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Colors
        11. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Size
        12. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Shape
        13. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Labels
        14. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Tooltip
        15. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Legend
        16. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Trellis
        17. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Marker By
    10. Map Chart
      1. What is a Map Chart?
      2. How to Use the Map Chart
      3. Map Chart Properties
        1. Map Chart Properties
        2. Map Chart Properties – General
        3. Map Chart Properties – Data
        4. Map Chart Properties – Appearance
        5. Map Chart Properties – Fonts
        6. Map Chart Properties – Colors
        7. Map Chart Properties – Size
        8. Map Chart Properties – Shape
        9. Map Chart Properties – Labels
        10. Map Chart Properties – Tooltip
        11. Map Chart Properties – Legend
        12. Map Chart Properties – Trellis
        13. Map Chart Properties – Line Connection
        14. Map Chart Properties – Marker By
        15. Details on Add Data Table
        16. Details on Position Settings
      4. Configuration of Geographical Data for Map Charts
    11. Treemap
      1. What is a Treemap?
      2. How to Use the Treemap
      3. Treemap Properties
        1. Treemap Properties
        2. Treemap Properties – General
        3. Treemap Properties – Data
        4. Treemap Properties – Fonts
        5. Treemap Properties – Colors
        6. Treemap Properties – Size
        7. Treemap Properties – Hierarchy
        8. Treemap Properties – Labels
        9. Treemap Properties – Tooltip
        10. Treemap Properties – Legend
        11. Treemap Properties – Trellis
    12. Heat Map
      1. What is a Heat Map?
      2. How to Use the Heat Map
      3. Dendrograms and Clustering
      4. Importing/Exporting Dendrograms
      5. Heat Map Properties
        1. Heat Map Properties
        2. Heat Map Properties – General
        3. Heat Map Properties – Data
        4. Heat Map Properties – Fonts
        5. Heat Map Properties – Cell Values
        6. Heat Map Properties – X-axis
        7. Heat Map Properties – Y-axis
        8. Heat Map Properties – Colors
        9. Heat Map Properties – Sorting
        10. Heat Map Properties – Tooltip
        11. Heat Map Properties – Legend
        12. Heat Map Properties – Trellis
        13. Heat Map Properties – Dendrograms
        14. Details on Edit Clustering Settings
        15. Details on Export Dendrogram
    13. Parallel Corrdinate Plot
      1. What is a Parallel Coordinate Plot?
      2. How to Use the Parallel Coordinate Plot
      3. Parallel Corrdinate Plot Properties
        1. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties
        2. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – General
        3. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Data
        4. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Appearance
        5. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Formatting
        6. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Fonts
        7. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Scale Labels
        8. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Columns
        9. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Colors
        10. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Labels
        11. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Tooltip
        12. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Legend
        13. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Trellis
        14. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Line By
    14. Summary Table
      1. What is a Summary Table?
      2. How to Use the Summary Table
      3. Summary Table Properties
        1. Summary Table Properties
        2. Summary Table Properties – General
        3. Summary Table Properties – Data
        4. Summary Table Properties – Appearance
        5. Summary Table Properties – Fonts
        6. Summary Table Properties – Columns
        7. Summary Table Properties – Sorting
        8. Summary Table Properties – Statistical Measures
        9. Summary Table Properties – Legend
      4. Statistical Measures Overview 
    15. Box Plot
      1. What is a Box Plot?
      2. How to Use the Box Plot
      3. What are Comparison Circles?
      4. Box Plot Properties
        1. Box Plot Properties
        2. Box Plot Properties – General
        3. Box Plot Properties – Data
        4. Box Plot Properties – Appearance
        5. Box Plot Properties – Formatting
        6. Box Plot Properties – Fonts
        7. Box Plot Properties – X-axis
        8. Box Plot Properties – Y-axis
        9. Box Plot Properties – Reference Points
        10. Box Plot Properties – Colors
        11. Box Plot Properties – Tooltip
        12. Box Plot Properties – Legend
        13. Box Plot Properties – Trellis
        14. Box Plot Properties – Statistics Table
        15. Box Plot Properties – Lines & Curves
        16. Details on Alpha Level
      5. Statistical Measures Overview 
      6. Comparison Circles Algorithm
    16. Text Area
      1. How to Use the Text Area
      2. Text Area Edit Mode
      3. Using Properties in the Analysis
      4. Using Scripts in the Text Area
      5. IronPython Example Scripts
      6. Action Script Examples
      7. Details
        1. Details on Action Control
        2. Details on Bookmark Filter Settings
        3. Details on Panel Visibility Settings
        4. Details on New/Edit Script
        5. Details on Add/Edit Script Parameter
        6. Details on Action Settings
        7. Details on Select Property
        8. Details on Property Control
        9. Details on Select Columns
        10. Details on Selection Constraints
        11. Details on Insert Filter
        12. Details on Format Control
        13. Text Area Properties – General
        14. Text Area Pop-up Menus
    17. Details on General Dialogues
  2. Using Visualizations
    1. Interacting with Visualizations
      1. Marking in Visualizations
      2. Highlighting in Visualizations
      3. Drag-and-Drop
      4. Zoom Sliders
    2. Column Selection
      1. Column Selectors
      2. Non-Column Selections
      3. What is Column from Marked?
      4. Details on Column from Marked
      5. Details on Set from Property
      6. Aggregation
    3. Legend
    4. Shortcuts
    5. Hierarchies
      1. Hierarchies
      2. Hierarchy Slider
      3. Working with Time Hierarchies
    6. Trellis Visualizations
    7. Information and Warnings
    8. Statistical Measures
      1. Statistical Measures Overview 
      2. Sum and Product
      3. Average 
      4. Count 
      5. Unique Count
      6. Min and Max
      7. Median 
      8. Standard Deviation 
      9. Standard Error 
      10. Variance 
      11. Confidence Intervals 
      12. Percentiles and Quartiles
      13. Adjacent Values and Outliers
      14. Concatenate and Unique Concatenate
      15. First and Last
      16. Geometric Mean
      17. Mean Deviation
      18. Median Absolute Deviation
      19. Most Common

Visualizations

Last modified
Table of contents
  1. Visualizations
    1. Table
      1. What is a Table?
      2. How to Use the Table
      3. Images in Tables
      4. Virtual Columns
      5. Table Properties
        1. Table Properties
        2. Table Properties – General
        3. Table Properties – Data
        4. Table Properties – Appearance
        5. Table Properties – Fonts
        6. Table Properties – Columns
        7. Table Properties – Virtual Columns
        8. Table Properties – Colors
        9. Table Properties – Sorting
        10. Table Properties – Legend
        11. Details on Column Width
    2. Cross Table
      1. What is a Cross Table?
      2. How to Use the Cross Table
      3. Formatting in the Cross Table
      4. Cross Table Properties
        1. Cross Table Properties
        2. Cross Table Properties – General
        3. Cross Table Properties – Data
        4. Cross Table Properties – Appearance
        5. Cross Table Properties – Column Subtotals
        6. Cross Table Properties – Formatting
        7. Cross Table Properties – Fonts
        8. Cross Table Properties – Axes
        9. Cross Table Properties – Colors
        10. Cross Table Properties – Sorting
        11. Cross Table Properties – Legend
    3. Graphical Table
      1. What is a Graphical Table?
      2. How to Use the Graphical Table
      3. Graphical Table Properties
        1. Graphical Table Properties
        2. Graphical Table Properties – General
        3. Graphical Table Properties – Data
        4. Graphical Table Properties – Appearance
        5. Graphical Table Properties – Fonts
        6. Graphical Table Properties – Axes
        7. Graphical Table Properties – Legend
      4. Sparkline
        1. What are Sparklines?
        2. How to Use Sparklines
        3. Sparkline Settings
        4. Sparkline Settings – General
        5. Sparkline Settings – Data
        6. Sparkline Settings – Appearance
        7. Sparkline Settings – Formatting
        8. Sparkline Settings – Axes
        9. Sparkline Settings – Actions
        10. Sparkline Settings – Tooltip
      5. Calculated Value
        1. What are Calculated Values?
        2. How to Use Calculated Values
        3. Calculated Value Settings
        4. Calculated Value Settings – General
        5. Calculated Value Settings – Data
        6. Calculated Value Settings – Formatting
        7. Calculated Value Settings – Values
        8. Calculated Value Settings – Actions
        9. Calculated Value Settings – Tooltip
        10. Details on Add/Edit Rule
      6. Icon
        1. What are Icons?
        2. How to Use Icons
        3. Icon Settings
        4. Icon Settings – General
        5. Icon Settings – Data
        6. Icon Settings – Icons
        7. Icon Settings – Actions
        8. Icon Settings – Tooltip
        9. Details on Add/Edit Rule
      7. Bullet Graph
        1. What are Bullet Graphs?
        2. How to Use Bullet Graphs
        3. Bullet Graph Settings
        4. Bullet Graph Settings – General
        5. Bullet Graph Settings – Data
        6. Bullet Graph Settings – Formatting
        7. Bullet Graph Settings – Bullet Graphs
        8. Bullet Graph Settings – Color Ranges
        9. Bullet Graph Settings – Actions
        10. Bullet Graph Settings – Tooltip
    4. Bar Chart
      1. What is a Bar Chart?
      2. How to Use the Bar Chart
      3. Bar Chart Properties
        1. Bar Chart Properties
        2. Bar Chart Properties – General
        3. Bar Chart Properties – Data
        4. Bar Chart Properties – Appearance
        5. Bar Chart Properties – Formatting
        6. Bar Chart Properties – Fonts
        7. Bar Chart Properties – Category Axis
        8. Bar Chart Properties – Value Axis
        9. Bar Chart Properties – Colors
        10. Bar Chart Properties – Labels
        11. Bar Chart Properties – Tooltip
        12. Bar Chart Properties – Legend
        13. Bar Chart Properties – Trellis
        14. Bar Chart Properties – Lines & Curves
        15. Bar Chart Properties – Error Bars
    5. Line Chart
      1. What is a Line Chart?
      2. How to Use the Line Chart
      3. Line Chart Properties
        1. Line Chart Properties
        2. Line Chart Properties – General
        3. Line Chart Properties – Data
        4. Line Chart Properties – Appearance
        5. Line Chart Properties – Formatting
        6. Line Chart Properties – Fonts
        7. Line Chart Properties – X-axis
        8. Line Chart Properties – Y-axis
        9. Line Chart Properties – Line By
        10. Line Chart Properties – Colors
        11. Line Chart Properties – Labels
        12. Line Chart Properties – Tooltip
        13. Line Chart Properties – Legend
        14. Line Chart Properties – Trellis
        15. Line Chart Properties – Lines & Curves
        16. Line Chart Properties – Error Bars
    6. Combination Chart
      1. What is a Combination Chart?
      2. How to Use the Combination Chart
      3. Combination Chart Properties
        1. Combination Chart Properties
        2. Combination Chart Properties – General
        3. Combination Chart Properties – Data
        4. Combination Chart Properties – Appearance
        5. Combination Chart Properties – Formatting
        6. Combination Chart Properties – Fonts
        7. Combination Chart Properties – X-axis
        8. Combination Chart Properties – Y-axis
        9. Combination Chart Properties – Series
        10. Combination Chart Properties – Labels
        11. Combination Chart Properties – Tooltip
        12. Combination Chart Properties – Legend
        13. Combination Chart Properties – Trellis
        14. Combination Chart Properties – Lines & Curves
    7. Pie Chart
      1. What is a Pie Chart?
      2. How to Use the Pie Chart
      3. Pie Chart Properties
        1. Pie Chart Properties
        2. Pie Chart Properties – General
        3. Pie Chart Properties – Data
        4. Pie Chart Properties – Appearance
        5. Pie Chart Properties – Fonts
        6. Pie Chart Properties – Colors
        7. Pie Chart Properties – Size
        8. Pie Chart Properties – Labels
        9. Pie Chart Properties – Tooltip
        10. Pie Chart Properties – Legend
        11. Pie Chart Properties – Trellis
    8. Scatter Plot
      1. What is a Scatter Plot?
      2. How to Use the Scatter Plot
      3. Scatter Plot Properties
        1. Scatter Plot Properties
        2. Scatter Plot Properties – General
        3. Scatter Plot Properties – Data
        4. Scatter Plot Properties – Appearance
        5. Scatter Plot Properties – Formatting
        6. Scatter Plot Properties – Fonts
        7. Scatter Plot Properties – X-axis
        8. Scatter Plot Properties – Y-axis
        9. Scatter Plot Properties – Colors
        10. Scatter Plot Properties – Size
        11. Scatter Plot Properties – Shape
        12. Scatter Plot Properties – Labels
        13. Scatter Plot Properties – Tooltip
        14. Scatter Plot Properties – Legend
        15. Scatter Plot Properties – Trellis
        16. Scatter Plot Properties – Line Connection
        17. Scatter Plot Properties – Marker By
        18. Scatter Plot Properties – Lines & Curves
        19. Scatter Plot Properties – Error Bars
    9. 3D Scatter Plot
      1. What is a 3D Scatter Plot?
      2. How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot
      3. 3D Scatter Plot Properties
        1. 3D Scatter Plot Properties
        2. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – General
        3. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Data
        4. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Appearance
        5. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Formatting
        6. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Fonts
        7. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – X-axis
        8. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Y-axis
        9. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Z-axis
        10. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Colors
        11. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Size
        12. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Shape
        13. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Labels
        14. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Tooltip
        15. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Legend
        16. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Trellis
        17. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Marker By
    10. Map Chart
      1. What is a Map Chart?
      2. How to Use the Map Chart
      3. Map Chart Properties
        1. Map Chart Properties
        2. Map Chart Properties – General
        3. Map Chart Properties – Data
        4. Map Chart Properties – Appearance
        5. Map Chart Properties – Fonts
        6. Map Chart Properties – Colors
        7. Map Chart Properties – Size
        8. Map Chart Properties – Shape
        9. Map Chart Properties – Labels
        10. Map Chart Properties – Tooltip
        11. Map Chart Properties – Legend
        12. Map Chart Properties – Trellis
        13. Map Chart Properties – Line Connection
        14. Map Chart Properties – Marker By
        15. Details on Add Data Table
        16. Details on Position Settings
      4. Configuration of Geographical Data for Map Charts
    11. Treemap
      1. What is a Treemap?
      2. How to Use the Treemap
      3. Treemap Properties
        1. Treemap Properties
        2. Treemap Properties – General
        3. Treemap Properties – Data
        4. Treemap Properties – Fonts
        5. Treemap Properties – Colors
        6. Treemap Properties – Size
        7. Treemap Properties – Hierarchy
        8. Treemap Properties – Labels
        9. Treemap Properties – Tooltip
        10. Treemap Properties – Legend
        11. Treemap Properties – Trellis
    12. Heat Map
      1. What is a Heat Map?
      2. How to Use the Heat Map
      3. Dendrograms and Clustering
      4. Importing/Exporting Dendrograms
      5. Heat Map Properties
        1. Heat Map Properties
        2. Heat Map Properties – General
        3. Heat Map Properties – Data
        4. Heat Map Properties – Fonts
        5. Heat Map Properties – Cell Values
        6. Heat Map Properties – X-axis
        7. Heat Map Properties – Y-axis
        8. Heat Map Properties – Colors
        9. Heat Map Properties – Sorting
        10. Heat Map Properties – Tooltip
        11. Heat Map Properties – Legend
        12. Heat Map Properties – Trellis
        13. Heat Map Properties – Dendrograms
        14. Details on Edit Clustering Settings
        15. Details on Export Dendrogram
    13. Parallel Corrdinate Plot
      1. What is a Parallel Coordinate Plot?
      2. How to Use the Parallel Coordinate Plot
      3. Parallel Corrdinate Plot Properties
        1. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties
        2. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – General
        3. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Data
        4. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Appearance
        5. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Formatting
        6. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Fonts
        7. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Scale Labels
        8. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Columns
        9. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Colors
        10. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Labels
        11. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Tooltip
        12. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Legend
        13. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Trellis
        14. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Line By
    14. Summary Table
      1. What is a Summary Table?
      2. How to Use the Summary Table
      3. Summary Table Properties
        1. Summary Table Properties
        2. Summary Table Properties – General
        3. Summary Table Properties – Data
        4. Summary Table Properties – Appearance
        5. Summary Table Properties – Fonts
        6. Summary Table Properties – Columns
        7. Summary Table Properties – Sorting
        8. Summary Table Properties – Statistical Measures
        9. Summary Table Properties – Legend
      4. Statistical Measures Overview 
    15. Box Plot
      1. What is a Box Plot?
      2. How to Use the Box Plot
      3. What are Comparison Circles?
      4. Box Plot Properties
        1. Box Plot Properties
        2. Box Plot Properties – General
        3. Box Plot Properties – Data
        4. Box Plot Properties – Appearance
        5. Box Plot Properties – Formatting
        6. Box Plot Properties – Fonts
        7. Box Plot Properties – X-axis
        8. Box Plot Properties – Y-axis
        9. Box Plot Properties – Reference Points
        10. Box Plot Properties – Colors
        11. Box Plot Properties – Tooltip
        12. Box Plot Properties – Legend
        13. Box Plot Properties – Trellis
        14. Box Plot Properties – Statistics Table
        15. Box Plot Properties – Lines & Curves
        16. Details on Alpha Level
      5. Statistical Measures Overview 
      6. Comparison Circles Algorithm
    16. Text Area
      1. How to Use the Text Area
      2. Text Area Edit Mode
      3. Using Properties in the Analysis
      4. Using Scripts in the Text Area
      5. IronPython Example Scripts
      6. Action Script Examples
      7. Details
        1. Details on Action Control
        2. Details on Bookmark Filter Settings
        3. Details on Panel Visibility Settings
        4. Details on New/Edit Script
        5. Details on Add/Edit Script Parameter
        6. Details on Action Settings
        7. Details on Select Property
        8. Details on Property Control
        9. Details on Select Columns
        10. Details on Selection Constraints
        11. Details on Insert Filter
        12. Details on Format Control
        13. Text Area Properties – General
        14. Text Area Pop-up Menus
    17. Details on General Dialogues
  2. Using Visualizations
    1. Interacting with Visualizations
      1. Marking in Visualizations
      2. Highlighting in Visualizations
      3. Drag-and-Drop
      4. Zoom Sliders
    2. Column Selection
      1. Column Selectors
      2. Non-Column Selections
      3. What is Column from Marked?
      4. Details on Column from Marked
      5. Details on Set from Property
      6. Aggregation
    3. Legend
    4. Shortcuts
    5. Hierarchies
      1. Hierarchies
      2. Hierarchy Slider
      3. Working with Time Hierarchies
    6. Trellis Visualizations
    7. Information and Warnings
    8. Statistical Measures
      1. Statistical Measures Overview 
      2. Sum and Product
      3. Average 
      4. Count 
      5. Unique Count
      6. Min and Max
      7. Median 
      8. Standard Deviation 
      9. Standard Error 
      10. Variance 
      11. Confidence Intervals 
      12. Percentiles and Quartiles
      13. Adjacent Values and Outliers
      14. Concatenate and Unique Concatenate
      15. First and Last
      16. Geometric Mean
      17. Mean Deviation
      18. Median Absolute Deviation
      19. Most Common

  1. Visualizations
    1. Table
      1. What is a Table?
      2. How to Use the Table
      3. Images in Tables
      4. Virtual Columns
      5. Table Properties
        1. Table Properties
        2. Table Properties – General
        3. Table Properties – Data
        4. Table Properties – Appearance
        5. Table Properties – Fonts
        6. Table Properties – Columns
        7. Table Properties – Virtual Columns
        8. Table Properties – Colors
        9. Table Properties – Sorting
        10. Table Properties – Legend
        11. Details on Column Width
    2. Cross Table
      1. What is a Cross Table?
      2. How to Use the Cross Table
      3. Formatting in the Cross Table
      4. Cross Table Properties
        1. Cross Table Properties
        2. Cross Table Properties – General
        3. Cross Table Properties – Data
        4. Cross Table Properties – Appearance
        5. Cross Table Properties – Column Subtotals
        6. Cross Table Properties – Formatting
        7. Cross Table Properties – Fonts
        8. Cross Table Properties – Axes
        9. Cross Table Properties – Colors
        10. Cross Table Properties – Sorting
        11. Cross Table Properties – Legend
    3. Graphical Table
      1. What is a Graphical Table?
      2. How to Use the Graphical Table
      3. Graphical Table Properties
        1. Graphical Table Properties
        2. Graphical Table Properties – General
        3. Graphical Table Properties – Data
        4. Graphical Table Properties – Appearance
        5. Graphical Table Properties – Fonts
        6. Graphical Table Properties – Axes
        7. Graphical Table Properties – Legend
      4. Sparkline
        1. What are Sparklines?
        2. How to Use Sparklines
        3. Sparkline Settings
        4. Sparkline Settings – General
        5. Sparkline Settings – Data
        6. Sparkline Settings – Appearance
        7. Sparkline Settings – Formatting
        8. Sparkline Settings – Axes
        9. Sparkline Settings – Actions
        10. Sparkline Settings – Tooltip
      5. Calculated Value
        1. What are Calculated Values?
        2. How to Use Calculated Values
        3. Calculated Value Settings
        4. Calculated Value Settings – General
        5. Calculated Value Settings – Data
        6. Calculated Value Settings – Formatting
        7. Calculated Value Settings – Values
        8. Calculated Value Settings – Actions
        9. Calculated Value Settings – Tooltip
        10. Details on Add/Edit Rule
      6. Icon
        1. What are Icons?
        2. How to Use Icons
        3. Icon Settings
        4. Icon Settings – General
        5. Icon Settings – Data
        6. Icon Settings – Icons
        7. Icon Settings – Actions
        8. Icon Settings – Tooltip
        9. Details on Add/Edit Rule
      7. Bullet Graph
        1. What are Bullet Graphs?
        2. How to Use Bullet Graphs
        3. Bullet Graph Settings
        4. Bullet Graph Settings – General
        5. Bullet Graph Settings – Data
        6. Bullet Graph Settings – Formatting
        7. Bullet Graph Settings – Bullet Graphs
        8. Bullet Graph Settings – Color Ranges
        9. Bullet Graph Settings – Actions
        10. Bullet Graph Settings – Tooltip
    4. Bar Chart
      1. What is a Bar Chart?
      2. How to Use the Bar Chart
      3. Bar Chart Properties
        1. Bar Chart Properties
        2. Bar Chart Properties – General
        3. Bar Chart Properties – Data
        4. Bar Chart Properties – Appearance
        5. Bar Chart Properties – Formatting
        6. Bar Chart Properties – Fonts
        7. Bar Chart Properties – Category Axis
        8. Bar Chart Properties – Value Axis
        9. Bar Chart Properties – Colors
        10. Bar Chart Properties – Labels
        11. Bar Chart Properties – Tooltip
        12. Bar Chart Properties – Legend
        13. Bar Chart Properties – Trellis
        14. Bar Chart Properties – Lines & Curves
        15. Bar Chart Properties – Error Bars
    5. Line Chart
      1. What is a Line Chart?
      2. How to Use the Line Chart
      3. Line Chart Properties
        1. Line Chart Properties
        2. Line Chart Properties – General
        3. Line Chart Properties – Data
        4. Line Chart Properties – Appearance
        5. Line Chart Properties – Formatting
        6. Line Chart Properties – Fonts
        7. Line Chart Properties – X-axis
        8. Line Chart Properties – Y-axis
        9. Line Chart Properties – Line By
        10. Line Chart Properties – Colors
        11. Line Chart Properties – Labels
        12. Line Chart Properties – Tooltip
        13. Line Chart Properties – Legend
        14. Line Chart Properties – Trellis
        15. Line Chart Properties – Lines & Curves
        16. Line Chart Properties – Error Bars
    6. Combination Chart
      1. What is a Combination Chart?
      2. How to Use the Combination Chart
      3. Combination Chart Properties
        1. Combination Chart Properties
        2. Combination Chart Properties – General
        3. Combination Chart Properties – Data
        4. Combination Chart Properties – Appearance
        5. Combination Chart Properties – Formatting
        6. Combination Chart Properties – Fonts
        7. Combination Chart Properties – X-axis
        8. Combination Chart Properties – Y-axis
        9. Combination Chart Properties – Series
        10. Combination Chart Properties – Labels
        11. Combination Chart Properties – Tooltip
        12. Combination Chart Properties – Legend
        13. Combination Chart Properties – Trellis
        14. Combination Chart Properties – Lines & Curves
    7. Pie Chart
      1. What is a Pie Chart?
      2. How to Use the Pie Chart
      3. Pie Chart Properties
        1. Pie Chart Properties
        2. Pie Chart Properties – General
        3. Pie Chart Properties – Data
        4. Pie Chart Properties – Appearance
        5. Pie Chart Properties – Fonts
        6. Pie Chart Properties – Colors
        7. Pie Chart Properties – Size
        8. Pie Chart Properties – Labels
        9. Pie Chart Properties – Tooltip
        10. Pie Chart Properties – Legend
        11. Pie Chart Properties – Trellis
    8. Scatter Plot
      1. What is a Scatter Plot?
      2. How to Use the Scatter Plot
      3. Scatter Plot Properties
        1. Scatter Plot Properties
        2. Scatter Plot Properties – General
        3. Scatter Plot Properties – Data
        4. Scatter Plot Properties – Appearance
        5. Scatter Plot Properties – Formatting
        6. Scatter Plot Properties – Fonts
        7. Scatter Plot Properties – X-axis
        8. Scatter Plot Properties – Y-axis
        9. Scatter Plot Properties – Colors
        10. Scatter Plot Properties – Size
        11. Scatter Plot Properties – Shape
        12. Scatter Plot Properties – Labels
        13. Scatter Plot Properties – Tooltip
        14. Scatter Plot Properties – Legend
        15. Scatter Plot Properties – Trellis
        16. Scatter Plot Properties – Line Connection
        17. Scatter Plot Properties – Marker By
        18. Scatter Plot Properties – Lines & Curves
        19. Scatter Plot Properties – Error Bars
    9. 3D Scatter Plot
      1. What is a 3D Scatter Plot?
      2. How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot
      3. 3D Scatter Plot Properties
        1. 3D Scatter Plot Properties
        2. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – General
        3. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Data
        4. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Appearance
        5. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Formatting
        6. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Fonts
        7. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – X-axis
        8. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Y-axis
        9. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Z-axis
        10. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Colors
        11. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Size
        12. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Shape
        13. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Labels
        14. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Tooltip
        15. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Legend
        16. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Trellis
        17. 3D Scatter Plot Properties – Marker By
    10. Map Chart
      1. What is a Map Chart?
      2. How to Use the Map Chart
      3. Map Chart Properties
        1. Map Chart Properties
        2. Map Chart Properties – General
        3. Map Chart Properties – Data
        4. Map Chart Properties – Appearance
        5. Map Chart Properties – Fonts
        6. Map Chart Properties – Colors
        7. Map Chart Properties – Size
        8. Map Chart Properties – Shape
        9. Map Chart Properties – Labels
        10. Map Chart Properties – Tooltip
        11. Map Chart Properties – Legend
        12. Map Chart Properties – Trellis
        13. Map Chart Properties – Line Connection
        14. Map Chart Properties – Marker By
        15. Details on Add Data Table
        16. Details on Position Settings
      4. Configuration of Geographical Data for Map Charts
    11. Treemap
      1. What is a Treemap?
      2. How to Use the Treemap
      3. Treemap Properties
        1. Treemap Properties
        2. Treemap Properties – General
        3. Treemap Properties – Data
        4. Treemap Properties – Fonts
        5. Treemap Properties – Colors
        6. Treemap Properties – Size
        7. Treemap Properties – Hierarchy
        8. Treemap Properties – Labels
        9. Treemap Properties – Tooltip
        10. Treemap Properties – Legend
        11. Treemap Properties – Trellis
    12. Heat Map
      1. What is a Heat Map?
      2. How to Use the Heat Map
      3. Dendrograms and Clustering
      4. Importing/Exporting Dendrograms
      5. Heat Map Properties
        1. Heat Map Properties
        2. Heat Map Properties – General
        3. Heat Map Properties – Data
        4. Heat Map Properties – Fonts
        5. Heat Map Properties – Cell Values
        6. Heat Map Properties – X-axis
        7. Heat Map Properties – Y-axis
        8. Heat Map Properties – Colors
        9. Heat Map Properties – Sorting
        10. Heat Map Properties – Tooltip
        11. Heat Map Properties – Legend
        12. Heat Map Properties – Trellis
        13. Heat Map Properties – Dendrograms
        14. Details on Edit Clustering Settings
        15. Details on Export Dendrogram
    13. Parallel Corrdinate Plot
      1. What is a Parallel Coordinate Plot?
      2. How to Use the Parallel Coordinate Plot
      3. Parallel Corrdinate Plot Properties
        1. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties
        2. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – General
        3. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Data
        4. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Appearance
        5. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Formatting
        6. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Fonts
        7. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Scale Labels
        8. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Columns
        9. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Colors
        10. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Labels
        11. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Tooltip
        12. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Legend
        13. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Trellis
        14. Parallel Coordinate Plot Properties – Line By
    14. Summary Table
      1. What is a Summary Table?
      2. How to Use the Summary Table
      3. Summary Table Properties
        1. Summary Table Properties
        2. Summary Table Properties – General
        3. Summary Table Properties – Data
        4. Summary Table Properties – Appearance
        5. Summary Table Properties – Fonts
        6. Summary Table Properties – Columns
        7. Summary Table Properties – Sorting
        8. Summary Table Properties – Statistical Measures
        9. Summary Table Properties – Legend
      4. Statistical Measures Overview 
    15. Box Plot
      1. What is a Box Plot?
      2. How to Use the Box Plot
      3. What are Comparison Circles?
      4. Box Plot Properties
        1. Box Plot Properties
        2. Box Plot Properties – General
        3. Box Plot Properties – Data
        4. Box Plot Properties – Appearance
        5. Box Plot Properties – Formatting
        6. Box Plot Properties – Fonts
        7. Box Plot Properties – X-axis
        8. Box Plot Properties – Y-axis
        9. Box Plot Properties – Reference Points
        10. Box Plot Properties – Colors
        11. Box Plot Properties – Tooltip
        12. Box Plot Properties – Legend
        13. Box Plot Properties – Trellis
        14. Box Plot Properties – Statistics Table
        15. Box Plot Properties – Lines & Curves
        16. Details on Alpha Level
      5. Statistical Measures Overview 
      6. Comparison Circles Algorithm
    16. Text Area
      1. How to Use the Text Area
      2. Text Area Edit Mode
      3. Using Properties in the Analysis
      4. Using Scripts in the Text Area
      5. IronPython Example Scripts
      6. Action Script Examples
      7. Details
        1. Details on Action Control
        2. Details on Bookmark Filter Settings
        3. Details on Panel Visibility Settings
        4. Details on New/Edit Script
        5. Details on Add/Edit Script Parameter
        6. Details on Action Settings
        7. Details on Select Property
        8. Details on Property Control
        9. Details on Select Columns
        10. Details on Selection Constraints
        11. Details on Insert Filter
        12. Details on Format Control
        13. Text Area Properties – General
        14. Text Area Pop-up Menus
    17. Details on General Dialogues
  2. Using Visualizations
    1. Interacting with Visualizations
      1. Marking in Visualizations
      2. Highlighting in Visualizations
      3. Drag-and-Drop
      4. Zoom Sliders
    2. Column Selection
      1. Column Selectors
      2. Non-Column Selections
      3. What is Column from Marked?
      4. Details on Column from Marked
      5. Details on Set from Property
      6. Aggregation
    3. Legend
    4. Shortcuts
    5. Hierarchies
      1. Hierarchies
      2. Hierarchy Slider
      3. Working with Time Hierarchies
    6. Trellis Visualizations
    7. Information and Warnings
    8. Statistical Measures
      1. Statistical Measures Overview 
      2. Sum and Product
      3. Average 
      4. Count 
      5. Unique Count
      6. Min and Max
      7. Median 
      8. Standard Deviation 
      9. Standard Error 
      10. Variance 
      11. Confidence Intervals 
      12. Percentiles and Quartiles
      13. Adjacent Values and Outliers
      14. Concatenate and Unique Concatenate
      15. First and Last
      16. Geometric Mean
      17. Mean Deviation
      18. Median Absolute Deviation
      19. Most Common

Visualizations

Table

What is a Table?


The table in TIBCO Spotfire works much like any other table you might be familiar with. It presents the data as a table of rows and columns, and is used to see details and compare values.

By clicking on a row you mark it, and by dragging the mouse pointer over several rows you can mark more than one row.

You can sort the rows in the table according to different columns by clicking on the column headers, or filter out unwanted rows by using the filters.

Table.png

All visualizations can be set up to show data limited by one or more markings in other visualizations only (details visualizations). Tables can also be limited by one or more filterings. You can also set up a table without any filtering at all. See Limiting What is Shown in Visualizations for more information.

See also:

How to Use the Table

Table Properties

How to Use the Table


  • To change column order:

  1. Click on a column header and drag that column to the desired position.

    Comment: You can also right-click on a column header and select Move First or Move Last from the pop-up menu.
    Comment: You can also go to the Columns page in the Properties dialog and click on a column in the Selected columns list and then click Move Up or Move Down to change the order of the columns.

  • To change the column width:

  1. Place the mouse pointer at the right edge of the column header you want to resize (indicated by a thin line). The cursor changes into a cross with arrows.

  2. Adjust the width by holding down the mouse button and moving the mouse horizontally.

    Comment: You can also right-click on the column heading and select Column Width... from the menu that appears. Enter the width in number of pixels and click OK.

  • To remove columns:

  1. Right-click on a column header and select Remove.

  • To add columns:

  1. Right-click on the table and select Properties.

  2. Select the Columns page in the dialog.

  3. Select the columns you want to insert from the Available columns list.

  4. Click Add >.

    Response: The column is inserted to the right of all previously added columns.

    Comment: Click on a column in the Selected columns list and then click Move Up or Move Down to change the order of the columns.

  5. Click Close.

  • To apply coloring:

See Coloring in Tables to learn how to set up coloring for tables specifically. See Coloring Overview if you want to learn more about coloring in general.

  • To freeze certain columns when scrolling horizontally:

In a table with many columns you often need to scroll horizontally. However, there may be certain columns you want to see regardless of scrolling. This is achieved by freezing one or more columns.

  1. Move the columns you want to freeze to the left side of the table.

  2. Right-click on a column heading and select Properties.

  3. Select the Appearance page of the dialog.

  4. Specify the Number of frozen columns you want, counting from the left-hand side of the table.

  5. Click Close.

  • To show text as hyperlinks:

  1. It is possible to show the contents of a column as clickable links. To do this, right-click on the table visualization and select Properties.

  2. Select the Columns tab.

  3. Select the column you want to contain links.

  4. Select Link from the Renderer drop down list.

  5. Click Settings...

  6. Specify the settings in the Link Renderer Settings dialog and click OK.

  7. Click Close.

  • To sort the rows:

  1. Click on the header of the first column you wish to sort the data by.

    Comment: Click once again on the column header to toggle between Ascending and Descending row order.

  2. Press Shift and click on another column header to make a subsequent sort according to the values in that column.

  3. Repeat step 2 on other columns as many times as you like.

    Comment: You can also right-click in the table and open the Properties dialog. On the Sort Order tab, you can specify up to three columns to sort by.

  • To mark rows:

To mark a single row:

Either click on the row with the mouse, or use the up/down arrow keys on your keyboard.

To mark several separate rows:

Hold the Ctrl key and click on each row you want to add to the marked selection. You can also hold the Ctrl key and use the up/down arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight other rows and then press space to mark them as well.

To mark a range of rows:

Press the mouse button and drag the pointer over the table to mark all the rows under the selection. You can also mark the first row of your intended selection, hold the Shift key, and use the up/down arrow keys on the keyboard to expand the selection of marked rows.

To change the marked rows' color:

Select Edit > Document Properties, and then change the marked items' color.

  • To change row height:

  1. Right-click on the table visualization.

  2. Select Row Height and a number from the list.
    Comment: Specifying the number 2 will make the row twice as high as the standard height, and so on.
    OR

  3. Select Other...

  4. Enter a number in the Properties page.

  5. Click Close.
    Response: All rows in the table visualization change height.
    Note: This can also be done in the Details-on-Demand.

  • To copy a cell:

  • Right-click in the cell with the content you want to copy.

  • Depending on the content of the cell, different things can be copied. For example a text column lets you copy the text from the cell by selecting Value and for a column with links you can choose to copy either the displayed text or the actual link.
    Note: This can also be done in the Details-on-Demand.

  • To create a new table:

  1. Click on the New Table button on the toolbar, TableIcon.png.

    Comment: You can also select Insert > New Visualization > Table from the menu.

    Response: A table showing all available columns is created.

  2. Adjust the table to display the columns and sort order of your choice.

See also:

What is a Table?

Table Properties

Images in Tables

Virtual Columns

Images in Tables


It is possible to show images in the cells of a table visualization. A Spotfire analysis or information link can contain a data table with images that will be shown in the column in the table visualization.

ImagesinTable.png

If the column values are on the form of a URL you can also retrieve images from another location. Use Image from URL as the selected Renderer to display linked images.

 Another way of including pictures in the table visualization is if the column is a virtual column, collecting the images from a remote data source. For more information on virtual columns, see the Virtual Columns page.

Renderer

The images must be drawn using a renderer. All columns can be shown as an image depending on the renderer, but the most common data type for images is binary data. If a binary column containing images has been set to use the wrong renderer, "[...]" will be shown in the cells of the column. It is then possible to change the renderer manually.

  • To change renderer for a specific column in a table visualization:

  1. Right-click on the table visualization and select Properties.

  2. Select the Columns tab.

  3. Select the column containing the images.

  4. Select Image from the Renderer drop down list.

  5. Click Close.

It is also possible to change the default renderer for different content types from the Tools > Options menu. This will affect all future table visualizations, and can be useful if you know that you always want a certain column with a specific content type to be rendered the same way. For more information, see the Renderer Settings dialog.

Row height

By default, the height of the rows in the table visualization may not be suited for showing images. It is therefore possible to manually change the height of the rows.

  • To change row height:

  1. Right-click on the table visualization.

  2. Select Row Height and a number from the list.
    Comment: Specifying the number 2 will make the row twice as high as the standard height, and so on.
    OR

  3. Select More....

  4. Enter a number in the Properties page.

  5. Click Close.
    Response: All rows in the table visualization change height.

Copy the image

It is possible to copy the images from the table. To do this, right-click on the cell with the image and select Copy Cell > Image.

If the table contains images, these will not be exported if the table is exported to a text file or a Microsoft Excel file.

Note: Remember that your internet options settings affect the table visualizations and the text area, so if you have trouble viewing images, make sure that Show pictures is enabled in your web browser.

See also:

What is a Table?

How to Use the Table

Virtual Columns

Details on Renderer Settings

Virtual Columns


It is possible to include data in a table visualization (or in labels and tooltips of some other visualizations) that is not part of the original data table. A virtual column connects to a remote data source and collects data from there. This can be useful if, for example, a large quantity of data is stored in a database and the Spotfire analysis file would be too large if the data was included. The virtual columns can contain plain text but a more common use might be if the collected data were to consist of images or other large files.

Note: A virtual column type needs to be registered programmatically. Virtual columns are not available by default.

Differences between virtual columns and regular columns

In the context of the table visualization, there are no major differences except that you cannot sort by the virtual column. However, the virtual column is only part of the table visualization and not part of the data table. This means that:

  • No filter will be created for the virtual column.

  • No export of the underlying data table will include the virtual column. To export the data, the visualization, and not the data table, must be chosen. Copy will wait until the value has been collected in the virtual column and then copy the value.

  • Settings, such as changing the column's name, are not managed from Edit > Column Properties, but from the Virtual Columns tab in the properties page for the table visualization.

  • The virtual column will not be available for selection on axes in the other visualization types.

The virtual column may take some time to load, especially if the column contains images. However, the column will not be loaded all at once. It is possible to start working with the column and the contents will be loaded as you scroll down in the table.

Note: The remote data source from where the virtual column is retrieved may require you to enter a username and password.

See also:

What is a Table?

How to Use the Table

Images in Tables

Table Properties - Virtual Columns

Table Properties

Table Properties

The Table Properties dialog consists of several pages:

  • General

  • Data

  • Appearance

  • Fonts

  • Columns

  • Virtual Columns

  • Colors

  • Sorting

  • Legend

  • To reach the Table Properties dialog:

  1. Right-click on the table visualization.

  2. Select Properties from the pop-up menu.

    Comment: You can also click on the table visualization to make it active and then select Edit > Visualization Properties.

See also:

What is a Table?

How to Use the Table

Table Properties – General

TableProperties-General.png


Option

Description

Title

The title of the visualization.

Tip: Double-click on the title bar of the visualization for a shortcut to this field.

Show title bar

Specifies whether or not to show the visualization title.

Description

A description of the visualization. This description can optionally be shown in the legend and/or in the visualization.

Show description in visualization

Specifies whether or not to show the description in the visualization.

See also:

Table Properties

How to Use the Table

What is a Table?

Table Properties – Data

TableProperties-Data.png

Option

Description

Data table

Specifies the data table on which the visualization will work.

Marking

Specifies the marking (that is, the color and relationships to other marked items) that will be used to mark items in this visualization.

Limit data using markings

Lists the available markings that can be used to limit what is shown in this visualization. This means that the visualization only displays data that has been marked in other visualizations.

If more than one marking is selected, you can choose how the data in the markings should be combined.

New...

Opens the New Marking dialog where you can specify a new marking.

The color and name of a previously created marking is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Rows must be included in

Specifies how the data in the markings should be combined if you have selected to limit the data by more than one marking.

   All markings (AND)
  

Use this option if you want this visualization to show the intersection of the markings selected in Limit data using markings. This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in both markings. This visualization will then show only the data that has been marked using both of the selected markings.

   Any marking (OR)
   

Use this option if you want this visualization to show the union of the markings selected in Limit data using markings.

This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in either of the two markings. This visualization will then show data that has been marked using either of the selected markings.

Limit data using filterings

Defines how different filtering schemes in the analysis should affect this visualization.

Select Use the current filtering from the page if you want the visualization to always utilize the filtering scheme that is used on the page where the visualization is located. If you move the visualization to a new page, then the visualization will automatically start reacting on the filtering scheme that is used on the new page.

Select a specific filtering scheme from the list if you want the visualization to always use that filtering scheme. Moving the visualization to another page with a different filtering scheme will not affect this setting.

If you select to limit data using more than one filtering scheme, the intersection of the filterings will be used. This means that the visualization will show only the data that is made visible by all of the filtering schemes.

New...

Opens the New Filtering Scheme dialog where you can specify a new filtering scheme.

The color and name of a previously created filtering scheme is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Limit data using expression

You can limit what data should be available for a certain visualization using an expression. If you have defined a limiting expression, it will be displayed here.

Edit...

Opens the Limit Data Using Expression dialog where you can define a boolean expression to use for limiting the data in this visualization.

See also:

Table Properties

How to Use the Table

What is a Table?

Table Properties – Appearance

TableProperties-Appearance.png

Option

Description

Header row height (number of lines)

Specifies the height of the header row in number of lines.

Data row height (number of lines)

Specifies the height of all data rows in number of lines.

Number of frozen columns

Specifies how many columns on the left-hand side will be frozen, that is, not scroll out of sight when the scroll bar is moved to the right.

Show cell borders

Specifies whether or not cell borders should be visible between the cells in the table.

Allow table data export in Web Player

Specifies whether or not a Web Player user is allowed to export the data from the table.

See also:

Table Properties

How to Use the Table

What is a Table?

Table Properties – Fonts

TableProperties-Fonts.png

Option

Description

Settings for

Lists all items for which you can change the font settings. Click to select an item in the list to change the font settings for that text in the visualization. Press Ctrl and click on more items to change the settings for multiple items simultaneously.

Font

Specifies the font to use for the selected items.

Font style

Specifies the font style to use for the selected items.

Size

Specifies the font size to use for the selected items.

See also:

Table Properties

How to Use the Table

What is a Table?

Table Properties – Columns

TableProperties-Columns.png

Option

Description

Available columns

Lists all columns in the data table available for selection.

[Type to search]

Type a search string to limit the number of items in the Available columns list. It is possible to use the wildcard character * in the search. See Searching in TIBCO Spotfire for more information.

Selected columns

Lists the columns selected to be displayed in the table.

Add >

Adds the columns selected in the Available columns list to the Selected columns list.

< Remove

Removes the selected columns from the Selected columns list and sends them back to the Available columns list.

Remove All

Removes all columns from the Selected columns list.

Move Up

Moves the selected column up in the Selected columns list. The order of the columns in this list determines the order of the columns in the table.

Move Down

Moves the selected column down in the Selected columns list. The order of the columns in this list determines the order of the columns in the table.

Renderer

Lists the available renderers for the chosen column. Which renderers are available is determined by the content type of the column.

Add new columns automatically

Select the check box to make sure that any new columns added to the selected data table are also automatically added to the table visualization.

New columns can appear when refreshing an information link, calculating new columns, etc.

Settings...

Opens the settings dialog for the chosen renderer.

See also:

Table Properties

How to Use the Table

What is a Table?

Table Properties – Virtual Columns

TableProperties-VirtualColumns.png

Option

Description

Available virtual columns

Lists the available virtual columns.

Add

Lets you add virtual columns.

Edit...

Opens the edit dialog for the chosen virtual column.

Remove

Removes the chosen virtual column.

Display name

Type the name to be displayed for the chosen virtual column.

See also:

Table Properties

How to Use the Table

What is a Table?

Virtual Columns

Table Properties – Colors

TableProperties-Colors.png

Option

Description

Color scheme groupings

Lists all the currently added color scheme groupings. In table visualizations, a color scheme is always applied to a color scheme grouping, which can contain one or more columns. Click on a grouping in the list to select it and see its defined color scheme in the lower part of the dialog. By default, no coloring is applied when you create a new table. This means that the list is empty, and no color scheme is shown in the lower part of the dialog. To apply coloring, you must add one or more color scheme groupings and define color schemes for them. To learn more about color scheme groupings and coloring in tables, see Coloring in Tables.

Add

Opens a menu which lets you add a new color scheme grouping. The menu option Color Scheme Grouping... opens the Add Color Scheme Grouping dialog, in which you can select which columns to include in the new grouping. You can also give the grouping a descriptive name. The menu also lists each of the columns in the table. Select a column from the list to create a grouping containing only that column.

Note: A grouping can only contain columns with values of the same data type. The exception being the five numeric data types Integer, LongInteger, Real, SingleReal, and Currency which can be added to the same grouping.

Edit...

Opens the Edit Color Scheme Grouping dialog which lets you modify the selected grouping.

Remove

Removes the selected color scheme grouping from the list.

Color mode

Specifies in which color mode to set up the color scheme. Which modes are available depend on the columns in the selected color scheme grouping. For groupings containing continuous columns, you can select one of the following color modes: Gradient, Segments, Fixed, or Unique values. For categorical columns, you can select either Unique values or Fixed color mode. To learn more about the color modes, see Color Modes Overview.

One scale per

Specifies whether there should be one separate scale for each column in the color scheme grouping, or if one common scale should apply to all the columns.

ColorSchemeMenu.png

[Color Schemes menu]

Opens a menu where you can select an already existing color scheme and apply it to the visualization, or apply the current color scheme to another visualization in the analysis.

   From Visualization

Lets you select a color scheme from another visualization in the analysis. Only color schemes applicable to the columns in the current color scheme grouping will be listed.

   Document Color Schemes

Lets you select a color scheme that has previously been saved within the analysis. Only color schemes applicable to the columns in the current color scheme grouping will be listed. This menu option is only available if one or more document color schemes already exist.

   [Predefined color schemes]

Lists a number of predefined color schemes. Only available for color scheme groupings containing continuous columns. For a full description of the predefined color schemes, see Predefined Color Schemes.

Tip: To facilitate setting up a new color scheme, you can open a predefined color scheme with a similar appearance, and then adjust it to suit your needs.

   Open from Library...

Opens the Open from Library dialog where you can select a color scheme that has previously been saved to the library.

   Open from File...

Opens a dialog where you can select a previously saved color scheme.

   Save As

Lets you save a color scheme as a library item, a local file or a document color scheme.

Library Item – Opens the Save as Library Item dialog, where you can specify a location in the library and a file name to save the currently open color scheme for later reuse.

File – Opens a dialog where you can specify a location and a file name to save your currently open color scheme locally on your computer for later reuse.

Document Color Scheme – Opens the Save Document Color Scheme dialog, where you can specify a name and save the currently open color scheme for later reuse within the analysis.

   Apply to Visualizations...

Opens the Apply to Visualizations dialog where you can select other visualizations (within the analysis) that you want to apply the current color scheme to. Only visualizations with compatible color schemes are listed.

Note: If you apply a color scheme to a table, cross table, or heat map, the coloring will not take effect immediately. The color scheme will be added as an empty color scheme grouping, and you must select which columns or axis values to include in the grouping by opening the Edit Color Scheme Grouping dialog.

[Color scheme area]

The area in the lower part of the dialog shows the current color scheme. That is, the colors and values currently used for the selected color scheme grouping. You can modify color schemes in numerous ways to give the visualization the appearance you prefer. The color scheme area will look different, and have different available settings, depending on the characteristics of the columns in the color scheme grouping, as well as the selected color mode. To learn more about color schemes and color modes, see Color Schemes Overview and Color Modes Overview respectively.

Add Point

Available for continuous columns only. Adds a new anchor point to the color scheme.

Delete Point

Available for continuous columns only. Deletes the selected anchor point.

Add Rule...

Opens the Add Rule dialog where you can define a rule that functions as an exception to the rest of the defined color scheme. A rule has higher priority than the rest of the color scheme. For example, you can define a rule to give the top five items in your data a different color than the rest of the items. If you add many rules to a color scheme, the rules are prioritized from top to bottom. Which rule types are available depends on the characteristics of the columns in the color scheme grouping. See Details on Add/Edit Rule for full descriptions of the rule types.

Reset

Resets the selected color scheme to the one that was in effect when the visualization was created. Any added rules will be removed. Which color scheme should be used by default when you create a new visualization is defined in the Visualization page of the Options dialog.

Note: The color of marked items is changed under Edit > Document Properties.

See also:

Table Properties

How to Use the Table

What is a Table?

Table Properties – Sorting

TableProperties-Sorting.png

Option

Description

Sort by

Specifies the primary column you wish to sort the rows by.

Then by

Specifies the secondary and tertiary columns you wish to sort the rows by.

Ascending

Sorts the rows from the lowest to the highest value in the selected column.

Descending

Sorts the rows from the highest to the lowest value in the selected column.

Note: You cannot sort by a virtual column.

See also:

Table Properties

How to Use the Table

What is a Table?

Table Properties – Legend

TableProperties-Legend.png

Option

Description

Show legend

Specifies whether or not the docked legend should be shown in the visualization.

Position

Specifies which side of the visualization the legend should be positioned: the right-hand side or the left-hand side.

Display the following legend items

Specifies what will be shown in the legend.

By clearing a check box you will completely hide that item from the legend. You can also select to show or hide parts of the legend information using the check boxes under Settings for the selected item in the list, see below.

Settings

Defines how the selected legend item should be displayed. The available options vary between legend items.

   Show title

Use this option to show or hide the title for the selected item. The title is typically what is displayed above an axis selector or similar:

   Show axis selector

Select this option to show or hide the axis selector for the selected item.

See also:

Table Properties

How to Use the Table

What is a Table?

Details on Column Width

  • To reach the Column Width dialog:

  1. In a table visualization, right-click on the column header that you wish to change.

  2. Select Column Width... from the pop-up menu.

ColumnWidth.png

Option

Description

Column width

Specifies the width of the selected column in number of pixels.

Tip: You can also drag the column headers to change the width of columns.

See also:

How to Use the Table

Cross Table

What is a Cross Table?


A cross table is a two-way table consisting of columns and rows. It is also known as a pivot table or a multi-dimensional table. Its greatest strength is its ability to structure, summarize and display large amounts of data. Cross tables can also be used to determine whether there is a relation between the row variable and the column variable or not.

Optionally, the cross table can display grand totals for columns, rows, or for the whole measure. It can also display subtotals for columns,

Example:

Below is a cross table showing sales figures for different types of fruits and vegetables.

CrossTable-Examples.png

The same data displayed in a regular table takes up far more space and it is much more difficult to get an overview:

 

All visualizations can be set up to show data limited by one or more markings in other visualizations only (details visualizations). Cross tables can also be limited by one or more filterings. Another alternative is to set up a cross table without any filtering at all. See Limiting What is Shown in Visualizations for more information.

See also:

How to Use the Cross Table

Cross Table Properties

How to Use the Cross Table


  • To set up the cross table:

  1. Select a filter that represents the column you want to add to your cross table.

  2. Drag that filter into the cross table.

    Response: Three drop-targets appear.
    CrossTableIcons.png

  3. Drop the filter onto the drop-target you want. The first will place the column on the vertical axis, the second will place the column on the horizontal axis, and the third will use the column as the actual numeric values inside the cross-table.
    Note: You can also drag-and-drop the filters to the column selectors. This way you can set up hierarchies, which is a very powerful feature in a cross table.

  • To display grand totals for rows or columns:

  1. Right-click in the cross table to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Grand Total for Columns or Grand Total for Rows.

    Response: The selected grand total is displayed in the cross table.

    Comment: You can also make these selections from the Appearance page of the Cross Table Properties.

  • To display subtotals for columns:

To display subtotals in the cross table, the vertical axis must be set up as a hierarchy with at least two levels.

  1. Right-click in the cross table to open the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Subtotals for Columns.

    Response: A submenu is opened. It lists the columns and/or hierarchies currently on the vertical axis of the cross table. The options All and None are also available.

  3. Select a column (or level in a hierarchy) for which you want to show subtotals. Select All to display subtotals for all the columns (or hierarchical levels) on the vertical axis of the cross table.

    Response: The selected subtotals are displayed in the cross table.

    Comment: You can also make these selections from the Column Subtotals page of the Cross Table Properties.

  • To apply coloring:

See Coloring in Cross Tables and Heat Maps to learn how to set up coloring for cross tables specifically. See Coloring Overview if you want to learn more about coloring in general.

  • To change the column width:

  1. Place the mouse pointer at the right edge of the column header you want to resize. The cursor changes into a cross with arrows.

  2. Adjust the width by holding down the mouse button and moving the mouse horizontally.

    Comment: All value columns will be set to the new size. They cannot be specified separately.

    Note: You can also right-click on the cross table, and select Resize Cells to Fit from the pop-up menu. This will set the value columns to the smallest width possible, where all values are still visible.

  • To sort the cross table:

  1. Click on the column title or row title by which you wish to sort the cross table.

  2. Click again to sort in descending order and a third time to return to the default sort order.

    Comment: When you are sorting a cross table, you always work within the last category of a hierarchy. See Cross Table Properties -  Sorting for an example.

  • To mark the cells in an entire cross table category:

  1. Press Alt on the keyboard and click on the category title of interest.

    Comment: Clicking on the first category in a hierarchy will mark all rows or columns within this category. Clicking on the last category will only mark the rows or columns in that particular category.

  • To create a new cross table:

  1. Click on the New Cross Table button on the toolbar, CrossTableButton.png.

    Comment: You can also select Insert > New Visualization > Cross Table from the menu.

    Response: A first attempt to set up a suitable cross table is made by the application.

  2. Adjust the cross table to display the categories and measures of your choice.

See also:

What is a Cross Table?

Cross Table Properties

Formatting in the Cross Table


It is possible to format the values in the cross table on any of the axes. You can format the values either by opening the Formatting page of the Properties dialog, or by right-clicking directly in the cross table. The example below illustrates how formatting can be applied to a cross table.

Example:

The cross table below shows the sum of sales (Sum(Sales)) for fruits and vegetables for the years 2001, 2002, and 2003. The horizontal axis has the two columns Category and Type. The column Category contains the two axis values Fruit and Vegetables, and the column Type contains the values Apples, Bananas, Pears, Cucumber, Lettuce, and Tomatoes.

CrossTable-Examples.png

To format all the values for 2001 as currency, right-click on the row header 2001, choose Formatting and then select currency from the pop-up menu. The values in that row will be updated instantly with the new setting. To format the row containing the values for 2003, go through the same steps. The resulting cross table is shown below.

Note: To select another currency than $ you must open the properties dialog.

You can go through the same steps again to format the values for 2002. However, if you format the values for the Apples column instead, all the previous formatting settings will be reset, as seen in the cross table below.

Only the values in the column Apples are now formatted as currency, because you can only format values in one direction and at one level at a time. This means that if you format the values for Vegetables, then the values in Apples will be reset, as seen in the cross table below.

You can move a measure from one axis to another without losing the formatting settings you have defined. This means that if you were to move the column Category from the horizontal axis to the vertical axis, all the values for the Vegetables would still be formatted as currency.

If you right-click on any of the cells that are not row or column headers in the cross table and select a formatter, all the values in the cross table will get the new formatting settings.

However, if you add another column to the cell values axis it will only be possible to format on cell values. In the cross table below, Sum(Cost) was added to the cell values axis, and the column Type was removed.

It is no longer possible to format only the values for an individual year, nor the values only for Fruit or Vegetables. If you right-click on any of those header cells in the cross table, the pop-up menu will not provide any formatting options to choose from. However, you can still format the values on Sum(Sales) and Sum(Cost). If you right-click on one of the two header cells for Sum(Cost) and set formatting to currency, the cross table will look like the one below.

To learn more about additional formatting options for the cross table see Cross Table Properties - Formatting. For general information about formatting, see Formatting Overview.

See also:

What is a Cross Table?

How to Use the Cross Table

Cross Table Properties - Formatting

Formatting Overview

Formatting Settings

Cross Table Properties

Cross Table Properties

The Cross Table Properties dialog consists of several pages:

  • General

  • Data

  • Appearance

  • Column Subtotals

  • Formatting

  • Fonts

  • Axes

  • Colors

  • Sorting

  • Legend

  • To reach the Cross Table Properties dialog:

  1. Right-click on the cross table visualization.

  2. Select Properties from the pop-up menu.

    Comment: You can also click on the cross table visualization to make it active and then select Edit > Visualization Properties.

See also:

How to Use the Cross Table

What is a Cross Table?

Cross Table Properties – General

CrossTableProperties-General.png


Option

Description

Title

The title of the visualization.

Tip: Double-click on the title bar of the visualization for a shortcut to this field.

Show title bar

Specifies whether or not to show the visualization title.

Description

A description of the visualization. This description can optionally be shown in the legend and/or in the visualization.

Show description in visualization

Specifies whether or not to show the description in the visualization.

See also:

Cross Table Properties

How to Use the Cross Table

What is a Cross Table?

Cross Table Properties – Data

CrossTableProperties-Data.png

Option

Description

Data table

Specifies the data table on which the visualization will work.

Marking

Specifies the marking (that is, the color and relationships to other marked items) that will be used to mark items in this visualization.

Limit data using markings

Lists the available markings that can be used to limit what is shown in this visualization. This means that the visualization only displays data that has been marked in other visualizations.

If more than one marking is selected, you can choose how the data in the markings should be combined.

New...

Opens the New Marking dialog where you can specify a new marking.

The color and name of a previously created marking is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Rows must be included in

Specifies how the data in the markings should be combined if you have selected to limit the data by more than one marking.

   All markings (AND)
  

Use this option if you want this visualization to show the intersection of the markings selected in Limit data using markings. This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in both markings. This visualization will then show only the data that has been marked using both of the selected markings.

   Any marking (OR)
   

Use this option if you want this visualization to show the union of the markings selected in Limit data using markings.

This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in either of the two markings. This visualization will then show data that has been marked using either of the selected markings.

Limit data using filterings

Defines how different filtering schemes in the analysis should affect this visualization.

Select Use the current filtering from the page if you want the visualization to always utilize the filtering scheme that is used on the page where the visualization is located. If you move the visualization to a new page, then the visualization will automatically start reacting on the filtering scheme that is used on the new page.

Select a specific filtering scheme from the list if you want the visualization to always use that filtering scheme. Moving the visualization to another page with a different filtering scheme will not affect this setting.

If you select to limit data using more than one filtering scheme, the intersection of the filterings will be used. This means that the visualization will show only the data that is made visible by all of the filtering schemes.

New...

Opens the New Filtering Scheme dialog where you can specify a new filtering scheme.

The color and name of a previously created filtering scheme is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Limit data using expression

You can limit what data should be available for a certain visualization using an expression. If you have defined a limiting expression, it will be displayed here.

Edit...

Opens the Limit Data Using Expression dialog where you can define a boolean expression to use for limiting the data in this visualization.

See also:

Cross Table Properties

How to Use the Cross Table

What is a Cross Table?

Cross Table Properties – Appearance

CrossTableProperties-Appearance.png

Option

Description

Show cell borders

Specifies whether or not cell borders should be visible between the cells in the cross table.

Allow table data export in Web Player

Specifies whether or not a Web Player user is allowed to export the data from the cross table.

Grand total for columns

Specifies whether or not the selected aggregation measure (for example, the sum) of all values in a column should be displayed without consideration for the categories creating the rows of the cells.

See note below for details on the calculation.

Grand total for rows

Specifies whether or not the selected aggregation measure (for example, the sum) of all values in a row should be displayed without consideration for the different column categories.

See note below for details on the calculation.

Note: The aggregated value for grand totals is not calculated on the values shown in the cross table, but on the underlying row values. For example, if "Average" is used as aggregation measure, the grand total average of a column is calculated on the rows the column is based on and not on the values shown in the cross table.

See also:

Cross Table Properties

How to Use the Cross Table

What is a Cross Table?

Cross Table Properties – Column Subtotals

CrossTableProperties-ColumnSubtotals.png

Option

Description

Show subtotals for

Lists the columns and/or hierarchies on the vertical axis of the cross table. Select the ones you wish to display subtotals for.

A subtotal is a partial summarization of the values in a column and can be displayed if the vertical axis is set up as a hierarchy with at least two levels. The aggregated subtotal value is calculated using the selected aggregation measure, and is displayed for each category and at each hierarchy level.

Note: The aggregated value for subtotals is not calculated on the values shown in the cross table, but on the underlying row values. For example, if "Average" is used as aggregation measure, the subtotal average of a column is calculated on the rows the column is based on and not on the values shown in the cross table.

Note: Custom expressions with OVER statements should be used carefully in cross tables with subtotals. The subtotals depend on the statement the same way the cell values do, and some OVER statements may therefore result in subtotal values that seem unexpected at first glance. See OVER in Custom Expressions to learn more about using the OVER statement.

All

Selects all the columns in the list. Subtotals will be displayed for all the columns and/or hierarchical levels on the vertical axis of the cross table.

None

Deselects all the columns in the list. No subtotals will be displayed in the cross table.

Display subtotals

 

   Before values

Places the subtotal values before the cell values on each level in the hierarchy of the vertical axis.

   After values

Places the subtotal values after the cell values on each level in the hierarchy of the vertical axis.

See also:

Cross Table Properties

How to Use the Cross Table

What is a Cross Table?

Cross Table Properties – Formatting

CrossTableProperties-Formating.png

Option

Description

Format by

Lists the alternatives by which it is possible to format the values in the cross table. The drop-down list contains the columns that are visible on the horizontal and vertical axes of the cross table. It also contains the alternative (Cell Values) which lets you format the values for each measure. Select the alternative you wish to format by to see the axis values available for that alternative. When you change from one alternative to another in the drop-down list, all the previous formatting settings in the cross table will be reset.

Axis values

Lists the values on the selected axis, as well as the current formatting category used for each value. Click on the alternative that you want to format. You can select more than one value if you want to apply the same formatting to them. Only the cell values in the selected columns or rows will be affected. If you select (Cell Values), the Axis values list will contain all columns and aggregation methods used on the cell values axis. If the cell values axis contains more than one column, formatting will always be applied to cell values and Format by will be grayed out, as seen below:

CrossTableProperties-FormatingInsert.png

The cell values axis contains both Sum(Sales) and Sum(Cost), and the Format by drop-down list is grayed out.

Reset

Resets the formatting for the selected axis values according to the settings defined on column level. If no column formatting has been set, axis formatting settings defined in the Options dialog will be used. If no settings have been specified in the Options dialog, the default settings for the visualization type will be used.

Category

Lists the available formatting categories for the selected axis value. Each category in this list has separate settings. Which categories are available depends on the data type of the selected axis value. See Formatting Settings for a full description of all possible options.

Note: These settings affect only the current visualization. For general information about formatting, see Formatting Overview. See also Formatting in the Cross Table to learn more about how you can change formatting settings in the cross table.

See also:

Cross Table Properties

What is a Cross Table?

How to Use the Cross Table

Formatting Overview

Axis Formatting

Column Properties - Formatting

Cross Table Properties – Fonts

CrossTableProperties-Fonts.png

Option

Description

Settings for

Lists all items for which you can change the font settings. Click to select an item in the list to change the font settings for that text in the visualization. Press Ctrl and click on more items to change the settings for multiple items simultaneously.

Font

Specifies the font to use for the selected items.

Font style

Specifies the font style to use for the selected items.

Size

Specifies the font size to use for the selected items.

See also:

Cross Table Properties

How to Use the Cross Table

What is a Cross Table?

Cross Table Properties – Axes

CrossTableProperties-Axes.png

Option

Description

Horizontal

Specifies the column or hierarchy that should be used to define the column titles in the cross table.

Settings...

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog, where you can change the category mode to determine which combinations of categories to show. (In a cross table, the axes are always categorical and the scale mode cannot be changed.)

Note: If All values in data (nest) or All possible values (cross) are selected, all available categories, even empty ones, will be shown in the cross table regardless of filtering.

Vertical

Specifies the column or hierarchy that should be used to define the row titles in the cross table.

Settings...

See above.

Cell values

Specifies the column or hierarchy that should be used to define the actual values in the cross table.

See also:

Cross Table Properties

How to Use the Cross Table

What is a Cross Table?

Cross Table Properties – Colors

CrossTableProperties-Colors.png

Option

Description

Color by

Lists the alternatives by which it is possible to color the cross table. The drop-down list contains the columns that are visible on the horizontal and vertical axes of the cross table. It also contains the alternative (Cell Values) which lets you color the cross table by the column on the cell values axis. Select the alternative you wish to color by to set up a color scheme and see the available color scheme groupings for that alternative. If the cell values axis contains more than one column, you can only color by (Cell values) and the Color by drop-down list will be grayed out.

Color scheme groupings

Lists the currently available color scheme groupings for the selected column. In cross tables, a color scheme is always applied to a color scheme grouping. A default color scheme grouping named Numeric is always available for each of the columns in the cross table. Before any new color scheme groupings have been added, the default grouping contains all the values in the selected column. Click on a grouping in the list to select it and see its defined color scheme in the lower part of the dialog. To learn more about color scheme groupings and coloring in cross tables, see Coloring in Cross Tables and Heat Maps.

Add

Opens a menu which lets you add a new color scheme grouping. The menu option Color Scheme Grouping... opens the Add Color Scheme Grouping dialog, in which you can select values in the selected column to include in the new grouping. You can also give the grouping a descriptive name. The menu also lists all the values in the selected column as separate menu options. If you select one of these values from the menu, a grouping containing only that value will be added.

Edit...

Opens the Edit Color Scheme Grouping dialog which lets you modify an existing grouping. You cannot edit the default grouping named Numeric.

Remove

Removes the selected color scheme grouping from the list. You cannot remove the default grouping named Numeric.

Color mode

Specifies in which color mode to set up the color scheme. You can select one of the following color modes: Gradient, Segments, Fixed, or Unique values. To learn more about the color modes, see Color Modes Overview.

One scale per

Specifies whether there should be one separate scale for each axis value in the selected color scheme grouping, or if one single scale should apply to the entire grouping.

ColorSchemeMenu.png

[Color Schemes menu]

Opens a menu where you can select an already existing color scheme and apply it to the visualization, or apply the current color scheme to another visualization in the analysis.

   From Visualization

Lets you select a color scheme from another visualization in the analysis. Only color schemes applicable to the current color scheme grouping will be listed.

   Document Color Schemes

Lets you select a color scheme that has previously been saved within the analysis. Only color schemes applicable to the current color scheme grouping will be listed. This menu option is only available if one or more document color schemes already exist.

    [Predefined color schemes]

Lists a number of predefined color schemes. For a full description of the predefined color schemes, see Predefined Color Schemes.

Tip: To facilitate setting up a new color scheme, you can open a predefined color scheme with a similar appearance, and then adjust it to suit your needs.

   Open from Library...

Opens the Open from Library dialog where you can select a color scheme that has previously been saved to the library.

   Open from File...

Opens a dialog where you can select a previously saved color scheme.

   Save As

Lets you save a color scheme as a library item, a local file or a document color scheme.

Library Item – Opens the Save as Library Item dialog, where you can specify a location in the library and a file name to save the currently open color scheme for later reuse.

File – Opens a dialog where you can specify a location and a file name to save your currently open color scheme locally on your computer for later reuse.

Document Color Scheme – Opens the Save Document Color Scheme dialog, where you can specify a name and save the currently open color scheme for later reuse within the analysis.

   Apply to Visualizations...

Opens the Apply to Visualizations dialog where you can select other visualizations (within the analysis) that you want to apply the current color scheme to. Only visualizations with compatible color schemes are listed.

Note: If you apply a color scheme to a table, cross table, or heat map, the coloring will not take effect immediately. The color scheme will be added as an empty color scheme grouping, and you must select which columns or axis values to include in the grouping by opening the Edit Color Scheme Grouping dialog.

[Color scheme area]

The area in the lower part of the dialog shows the current color scheme. That is, the colors and values currently used for the selected color scheme grouping. You can modify color schemes in numerous ways to give the visualization the appearance you prefer. The color scheme area will look different, and have different available settings, depending on the characteristics of the color scheme grouping, as well as the selected color mode. To learn more about color schemes and color modes, see Color Schemes Overview and Color Modes Overview respectively.

Add Point

Adds a new anchor point to the color scheme.

Delete Point

Deletes the selected anchor point.

Add Rule...

Opens the Add Rule dialog where you can define a rule that functions as an exception to the rest of the defined color scheme. A rule has higher priority than the rest of the color scheme. For example, you can define a rule to give the top five items in your data a different color than the rest of the items. If you add many rules to a color scheme, the rules are prioritized from top to bottom. Which rule types are available depends on the characteristics of the color scheme grouping. See Details on Add/Edit Rule for full descriptions of the rule types.

Reset

Resets the selected color scheme to the one that was in effect when the visualization was created. Any added rules will be removed. Which color scheme should be used by default when you create a new visualization is defined in the Visualization page of the Options dialog.

Note: The color of marked items is changed under Edit > Document Properties.

See also:

Cross Table Properties

How to Use the Cross Table

What is a Cross Table?

Cross Table Properties – Sorting

Tip: Sorting is easily done by clicking directly on a column title or row title in the cross table visualization.

When you are sorting a cross table, you always work on the last node of a hierarchy. For example, if the cross table shows sales figures for different types of fruits and vegetables, as in the example under What is a Cross Table?, and you click on the Apples leaf node, only the cell values within the Fruit >> Apples hierarchy will affect the sorting. You cannot sort on the entire Fruit category while subcategories are being displayed.

CrossTableProperties-Sorting.png

Option

Description

Sort rows by

Select the cross table column title by which you wish to sort.

Ascending

Sorts the cross table by the selected column title in ascending order.

Descending

Sorts the cross table by the selected column title in descending order.

Show only top/bottom

Select this check box if you want to display a limited number of rows per category in the cross table. If you select ascending sort order, the rows with the bottom values will be shown. If you select descending sort order, the rows with the top values will be shown.

   Indicate hidden rows

Select this check box if you want to get an indication that some rows in the cross table are not displayed when the Show only top/bottom check box has been selected. A row with three dots in each cell will be added to indicate this.

Sort columns by

Select the row title you wish to sort the columns by in the cross table.

Ascending

Sorts the cross table by the selected row in ascending order.

Descending

Sorts the cross table by the selected row in descending order.

Show only top/bottom

Select this check box if you want to display a limited number of columns per category in the cross table. If you select ascending sort order, the columns with the bottom values will be shown. If you select descending sort order, the columns with the top values will be shown.

   Indicate hidden columns

Select this check box if you want to get an indication that some columns in the cross table are not displayed when the Show only top/bottom check box has been selected. A column with three dots in each cell will be added to indicate this.

See also:

Cross Table Properties

How to Use the Cross Table

What is a Cross Table?

Cross Table Properties – Legend

CrossTableProperties-Legend.png

Option

Description

Show legend

Specifies whether or not the docked legend should be shown in the visualization.

Position

Specifies which side of the visualization the legend should be positioned: the right-hand side or the left-hand side.

Display the following legend items

Specifies what will be shown in the legend.

By clearing a check box you will completely hide that item from the legend. You can also select to show or hide parts of the legend information using the check boxes under Settings for the selected item in the list, see below.

Settings

Defines how the selected legend item should be displayed. The available options vary between legend items.

   Show title

Use this option to show or hide the title for the selected item. The title is typically what is displayed above an axis selector or similar:

CrossTableProperties–LegendInsert1.png

   Show axis selector

Select this option to show or hide the axis selector for the selected item.

CrossTableProperties–LegendInsert1.png

See also:

Cross Table Properties

How to Use the Cross Table

What is a Cross Table?

Graphical Table

What is a Graphical Table?


A graphical table is a summarizing visualization designed to provide a lot of information at one glance. It can be set up to show columns with dynamic items such as sparklines, calculated values, conditional icons, or bullet graphs. One value is shown for each row as specified on the Rows axis. In the example below, the graphical table shows sales performance for different regions.

GraphicalTable1.png

You can add any number of dynamic items to a graphical table. Each dynamic item column uses its own axis expression and it can also be filtered and limited by markings separately. This way, you can show both the total values for some calculated value and the currently filtered values simultaneously. See Limiting What is Shown in Visualizations for more information.

When a hierarchical structure is used on the Rows axis, the graphical table is grouped into sections and sorting can be performed within each section by clicking on a column header.

GraphicalTable2.png

See also:

How to Use the Graphical Table

Graphical Table Properties

How to Use the Graphical Table


  • To create a new graphical table:

  1. Click on the New Graphical Table button on the toolbar,GraphicalTableButton.png .

    Comment: You can also select Insert > New Visualization > Graphical Table from the menu.

    Response: A graphical table showing one column is created. You can change which item type to be used as default under Tools > Options > Graphical Table.

  2. Adjust the table to display the items of your choice.

  • To add columns to a graphical table:

  1. Right-click on the graphical table to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Add to view the submenu.

  3. Select the type of dynamic item you want to add: Sparkline, Calculated Value, Icon, or Bullet Graph.

    Response: A new column with the selected type of item is added to the graphical table. A first attempt to set up a suitable column is made by the application, but you probably want to adjust the settings.

  4. Right-click on the new column to open the pop-up menu.

  5. Depending on the type of item you added, select either Sparkline Settings, Calculated Value Settings, Icon Settings, or Bullet Graph Settings.

    Comment: Note that each item added to a graphical table has its own settings.

  6. Make the necessary changes to the settings dialog so that the new column shows the information you want.

  7. When you are done, click Close.

    Comment: You can also add new columns by using drag-and-drop. See Drag-and-Drop to learn more.

  • To change column order:

  1. Click on a column header and drag that column to the desired position. Note that the row header column cannot be moved.

    Comment: You can also right-click on a column header and select Move First or Move Last from the pop-up menu.
    Comment: You can also go to the Axes page in the Graphical Table Properties dialog and click on a column in the Columns list and then click Move Up or Move Down to change the order of the columns.

  • To change the column width:

  1. Place the mouse pointer at the right edge of the column header you want to resize (indicated by a thin line).

    Response: The cursor changes into a double-arrow.

  2. Adjust the width by holding down the mouse button and moving the mouse horizontally.

    Comment: You can also right-click on the column header and select Column Width... from the menu that appears. Enter the width in pixels and click OK.

  • To remove a column:

  1. Right-click on a column header and select Remove.

  • To sort the rows:

  1. Click on the header of the column you wish to sort the data by. You can sort by columns containing calculated values, icons (based on the underlying calculation), and bullet graphs (based on the underlying calculation of the values).

    Comment: Click again on the column header to sort descending. Click once again to return to the original sort order.

    Comment: If a hierarchy is used on the graphical table row axis, then sorting will be performed within each category only.

  • To change row height:

  1. Right-click on the graphical table to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Properties.

  3. Go to the Appearance page.

  4. Increase the Additional row spacing (in pixels).

    Comment: The row heights are automatically increased if the font size is increased. The Additional row spacing setting only needs adjustment if you want to add a few more pixels between the rows.

  5. Click Close.

  • To copy marked rows:

  1. Mark the rows of interest in the graphical table.

  2. Right-click and select Copy from the pop-up menu.

    Response: Information about the marked rows is copied to the clipboard. For sparklines, the start point and end point Y-axis values are copied. For calculated values, the actual values are copied. For icons, any applied rules are displayed on the form of the shape and the specified HTML color code. For bullet graphs, the value representing the bar is copied, and if a comparative value exists this is also copied.

See also:

What is a Graphical Table?

Graphical Table Properties

How to Use Sparklines

How to Use Calculated Values

How to Use Icons

How to Use Bullet Graphs

Graphical Table Properties

Graphical Table Properties

The Graphical Table Properties dialog consists of several pages:

  • General

  • Data

  • Appearance

  • Fonts

  • Axes

  • Legend

  • To reach the Graphical Table Properties dialog:

  1. Click on the graphical table visualization to make it active and then select Edit > Visualization Properties.

See also:

What is a Graphical Table

How to Use the Graphical Table

Graphical Table Properties – General

GraphicalTableProperties-General.png


Option

Description

Title

The title of the visualization.

Tip: Double-click on the title bar of the visualization for a shortcut to this field.

Show title bar

Specifies whether or not to show the visualization title.

Description

A description of the visualization. This description can optionally be shown in the legend and/or in the visualization.

Show description in visualization

Specifies whether or not to show the description in the visualization.

See also:

Graphical Table Properties

How to Use the Graphical Table

What is a Graphical Table

Graphical Table Properties – Data

GraphicalTableProperties-Data.png


Option

Description

Data table

Specifies the data table on which the visualization will work.

Marking

Specifies the marking (that is, the color and relationships to other marked items) that will be used to mark items in this visualization.

Limit data using markings

Lists the available markings that can be used to limit what is shown in this visualization. This means that the visualization only displays data that has been marked in other visualizations.

If more than one marking is selected, you can choose how the data in the markings should be combined.

New...

Opens the New Marking dialog where you can specify a new marking.

The color and name of a previously created marking is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Rows must be included in

Specifies how the data in the markings should be combined if you have selected to limit the data by more than one marking.

   All markings (AND)
  

Use this option if you want this visualization to show the intersection of the markings selected in Limit data using markings. This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in both markings. This visualization will then show only the data that has been marked using both of the selected markings.

   Any marking (OR)
   

Use this option if you want this visualization to show the union of the markings selected in Limit data using markings.

This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in either of the two markings. This visualization will then show data that has been marked using either of the selected markings.

Limit data using filterings

Defines how different filtering schemes in the analysis should affect this visualization.

Select Use the current filtering from the page if you want the visualization to always utilize the filtering scheme that is used on the page where the visualization is located. If you move the visualization to a new page, then the visualization will automatically start reacting on the filtering scheme that is used on the new page.

Select a specific filtering scheme from the list if you want the visualization to always use that filtering scheme. Moving the visualization to another page with a different filtering scheme will not affect this setting.

If you select to limit data using more than one filtering scheme, the intersection of the filterings will be used. This means that the visualization will show only the data that is made visible by all of the filtering schemes.

New...

Opens the New Filtering Scheme dialog where you can specify a new filtering scheme.

The color and name of a previously created filtering scheme is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Limit data using expression

You can limit what data should be available for a certain visualization using an expression. If you have defined a limiting expression, it will be displayed here.

Edit...

Opens the Limit Data Using Expression dialog where you can define a boolean expression to use for limiting the data in this visualization.

See also:

Graphical Table Properties

How to Use the Graphical Table

What is a Graphical Table

Filtering Schemes

Graphical Table Properties – Appearance

GraphicalTableProperties-Appearance.png


Option

Description

Show

 

   Header row

Specifies whether or not the column headers at the top of the graphical table should be visible.

Tip: If you want to show or hide a specific column header, instead of the entire row of headers, open the Settings dialog for the column of interest, go to the General page and then select or clear the check box Show name in header.

   Row header name

Specifies whether or not the row header name should be visible.

This is the left-most header in the header row, displayed above the column containing the row headers in the graphical table. By default, the row header name is the name of the column on the row axis. If the row axis has a hierarchy of columns, then the row header name is the column at the lowest level in the hierarchy.

   Cell borders

Specifies whether or not cell borders should be visible in the graphical table.

   Only the first n rows

Select this check box if you want to display a limited number of rows in the graphical table. Note that the sort order in the graphical table affects which rows are shown.

      Indicate hidden rows

Select this check box if you want to get an indication that some rows in the graphical table are not displayed when the Only the first n rows check box has been selected. A row with three dots in each cell will be added to indicate this.

Additional row spacing (in pixels)

Specifies how many extra pixels should be added to each row.

Note: The row heights are automatically increased if the font size is increased. The Additional row spacing setting only needs adjustment if you want to add a few more pixels between the rows.

See also:

Graphical Table Properties

How to Use the Graphical Table

What is a Graphical Table

Graphical Table Properties – Fonts

GraphicalTableProperties-Fonts.png


Option

Description

Settings for

Lists all items for which you can change the font settings. Select an item in the list to change the font settings for that text in the visualization. Press Ctrl and click on more items to change the settings for multiple items simultaneously.

Font

Specifies the font to use for the selected items.

Font style

Specifies the font style to use for the selected items.

Size

Specifies the font size to use for the selected items.

See also:

Graphical Table Properties

How to Use the Graphical Table

What is a Graphical Table

Graphical Table Properties – Axes

GraphicalTableProperties-Axes.png


Option

Description

Rows

Specifies the column or hierarchy that should be used to define the rows in the graphical table.

   Settings...

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog, where you can change the category mode to determine which combinations of categories to show.

Columns

Lists the columns currently shown in the graphical table.

Add

Displays a menu where you can select which dynamic item to add to the graphical table. Once you make your selection, the selected item will be added to the Columns list, and a dialog where you can specify settings to use for that column will open.

Settings...

Opens the Settings dialog for the selected column.

Remove

Removes the selected column from the graphical table.

Move up

Moves the selected column up in the Columns list. The order of the columns in this list determines the order of the columns in the graphical table.

Move down

Moves the selected column down in the Columns list. The order of the columns in this list determines the order of the columns in the graphical table.

See also:

Graphical Table Properties

How to Use the Graphical Table

What is a Graphical Table

Graphical Table Properties – Legend

GraphicalTableProperties-Legend.png


Option

Description

Show legend

Specifies whether or not the docked legend should be shown in the visualization.

Position

Specifies which side of the visualization the legend should be positioned: the right-hand side or the left-hand side.

Display the following legend items

Specifies what will be shown in the legend.

By clearing a check box you will completely hide that item from the legend. You can also select to show or hide parts of the legend information using the check boxes under Settings for the selected item in the list, see below.

Settings

Defines how the selected legend item should be displayed. The available options vary between legend items.

   Show title

Use this option to show or hide the title for the selected item. The title is typically what is displayed above an axis selector or similar:

CrossTableProperties–LegendInsert1.png

   Show axis selector

Select this option to show or hide the axis selector for the selected item.

CrossTableProperties–LegendInsert1.png

See also:

Graphical Table Properties

How to Use the Graphical Table

What is a Graphical Table

Sparkline

What are Sparklines?

Sparklines are small, simple line graphs traditionally used for displaying trends or variations of some variable:

Sparklines.png

They can be displayed in the context of a graphical table or, separately, in a text area. The general idea of sparklines is that they can be included directly where they are needed, in tables or text, in order to provide context to a value. Sparklines can be set up to change with filtering like any traditional Spotfire visualization or they can be locked to show  fixed values, using the Data page in the Sparkline Settings dialog.

See also:

How to Use Sparklines

Sparkline Settings

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

How to Use Sparklines

Sparklines can be shown both separately in a text area or be included as a column in a graphical table. The behavior of the sparkline is quite similar in both places, but some differences exist. Therefore, this list of step instructions has been split into three different sections: Graphical table specific information, Text area specific information, and General information applicable to both instances.

Graphical table specific information

When sparklines are included in a graphical table, the settings for the sparkline column normally control a number of separate sparkline graphs, one for each value in the graphical table row axis.

  • To add a sparkline column to a graphical table:

  1. Right-click on the graphical table to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Add > Sparkline.

    Response: A new sparkline column is added to the graphical table. A first attempt to set up a suitable sparkline is made by the application, but you probably want to adjust the settings.

    Comment: You can also add a new sparkline column by using drag-and-drop. See Drag-and-Drop to learn more. Or, you can add a new sparkline from the Axes page of the Graphical Table Properties dialog.

  3. Right-click on the new column and select Sparkline Settings from the pop-up menu.

    Comment: Note that each sparkline  column added to a graphical table has its own settings.

  4. On the Axes page, select the column, hierarchy or expression to define the X-axis and Y-axis of the sparkline.

  5. On the General page, you may want to change the Name of the new column to something that describes the sparkline content.

    Comment: You can hide the name from the graphical table by clearing the Show name in header check box. (The entire header row of the graphical table can also be hidden by clearing the Header row check box on the Appearance page of the Graphical Table Properties.)

  6. If desired, make other changes to the default settings, such as changing the filtering scheme on the Data page, adding an action, or displaying start point and end point Y-axis values, see below.

  7. When you are done, click Close.

  • To remove a sparkline column from a graphical table:

  1. Right-click on the column header of the sparkline column you want to remove.

  2. Select Remove from the pop-up menu.

  • To change the column header for a sparkline column:

  1. Open the Sparkline Settings dialog and go to the General page.

  2. Type a new Name for the column.

  3. Make sure that the Show name in header check box is selected.

  4. Click Close.

  • To hide the column name from a graphical table:

  1. Open the Sparkline Settings dialog and go to the General page.

  2. Clear the Show name in header check box.

    Comment: The entire header row of the graphical table can be hidden from the Appearance page of the Graphical Table Properties.

  3. Click Close.

  • To change the scale for a sparkline column in a graphical table:

  1. Open the Sparkline Settings dialog and go to the Axes page.

  2. Click to select whether to use One scale for all sparklines in this column or Multiple scales.

    Comment: Use One scale for all sparklines if you want to show the Y-axis values for all sparklines in this column presented using the same scale. Use Multiple scales to maximize the Y-axis variation within each sparkline.

  3. Click Close.

  • To display Y-axis start point/end point values for the sparkline:

  1. Open the Sparkline Settings dialog and go to the Appearance page.

  2. Select the Start point and/or End point check box.

    Response: The values are shown in the visualization.

  3. If desired, change how much space to use for the values by modifying the Y-axis values width.

    Comment: This setting does not change the total width of the column. To increase the total column width, place the mouse pointer at the right edge of the column header you want to resize and adjust the width by holding down the mouse button and moving the mouse horizontally.

  • To lock the sparkline column so it does not react to filtering:

  1. Open the Sparkline Settings dialog and go to the Data page.

  2. Make sure that the Specify separate data limiting radio button is selected.

  3. Clear all check boxes under Limit data using filterings.

    Comment: You can also select one specific filtering scheme and keep from modifying any of the filters in it.

  4. Click Close.

    Response: The sparkline shows all data, regardless of any filtering.

Text area specific information

When a sparkline is used in a text area it behaves slightly different from when it is included in a graphical table. For example, you will not get instant feedback to your setting changes since the sparkline does not show up until you leave the edit mode. However, the placement of the edit box tells you where in the text area the sparkline will show up. Below are some useful tips for working with sparklines in the text area.

  • To add a sparkline to a text area:

  1. Create a text area where you want the sparkline to reside.

  2. Click on the Toggle Edit Mode button, ToggleEditModeButton.png, in the text area title bar to make sure that the text area is in edit mode.

    Comment: You can also right-click and select Edit Text Area from the pop-up menu.

  3. Type some descriptive text in the text area regarding what the sparkline will show.

  4. Click on the Insert Dynamic Item button, InsertDynamicControlButton.png, and select the Sparkline option.

    Response: The Sparkline Settings dialog is displayed.

  5. On the Axes page, select the column, hierarchy or expression to define the X-axis and Y-axis of the sparkline.

    Comment: If desired, make other changes to the default sparkline settings, such as changing the filtering scheme on the Data page, adding an action, or displaying start point and end point Y-axis values, see below.

  6. Click OK.

    Response: The sparkline is added to the text area. Exit edit mode to view the final result.

  • To resize the sparkline in a text area:

  1. Click on the Toggle Edit Mode button, ToggleEditModeButton.png, in the text area title bar to make sure that the text area is in edit mode.

    Response: The outline of the sparkline is shown as a gray box.

  2. Click on the gray edit box to select it and drag either of the corners to resize the box.

  3. Click on the Toggle Edit Mode button, ToggleEditModeButton.png, in the text area title bar again, or click outside the text area in any other visualization to leave the Edit mode.

    Response: The final result is shown in the text area.

    Comment: You can always reset the size of the sparkline to the original size if you change your mind. Just open the Format Control dialog by right-clicking on the gray box, click on the Reset button and then OK, and the size will be reset.

  • To display Y-axis start point/end point values for the sparkline:

  1. Click on the Toggle Edit Mode button, ToggleEditModeButton.png, in the text area title bar to make sure that the text area is in edit mode.

  2. Open the Sparkline Settings dialog and go to the Appearance page.

  3. Select the Start point and/or End point check box.

  4. Click OK.

  5. Click on the Toggle Edit Mode button, ToggleEditModeButton.png, in the text area title bar again, or click outside the text area in any other visualization to leave the Edit mode.

    Response: The values are shown next to the sparkline.

    Comment: The values are not visible in edit mode. The gray edit box only indicates the size of the actual sparkline.

  • To lock the sparkline so it does not react to filtering:

  1. Open the Sparkline Settings dialog and go to the Data page.

  2. Clear all check boxes under Limit data using filterings.

    Comment: You can also select one specific filtering scheme and keep from modifying any of the filters in it.

  3. Click OK.

    Response: The sparkline now shows all data, regardless of any filtering.

General information

  • To add actions to be performed when clicking on the sparkline:

  1. Open the Sparkline Settings dialog and go to the Actions page.

  2. Select the Perform action on click check box.

  3. Click on Settings....

    Response: The Action Settings dialog is displayed.

  4. Type a good Description explaining what will happen when clicking on the sparkline.

    Comment: The description can be shown in the tooltip for the sparkline.

  5. Add the desired actions and click OK.

See also:

What are Sparklines?

Sparkline Settings

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Sparkline Settings

The Sparkline Settings dialog consists of several pages:

  • General

  • Data

  • Appearance

  • Formatting

  • Axes

  • Actions

  • Tooltip

  • To reach the Sparkline Settings dialog from a graphical table:

  1. Right-click on the sparkline column in a graphical table visualization.

  2. Select Sparkline Settings from the pop-up menu.

  • To reach the Sparkline Settings dialog from a text area:

  1. Click on the Toggle Edit Mode button, ToggleEditModeButton.png, in the text area title bar, to make sure that the text area is in edit mode.

    Comment: You can also right-click and select Edit Text Area from the pop-up menu.

  2. Double-click on the gray edit box representing the desired sparkline in the text area.

See also:

What are Sparklines?

How to Use Sparklines

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Sparkline Settings – General

SparklineSettings-General.png


Option

Description

Name

The name of the sparkline. If the sparkline is included in a graphical table, then this name is the column header which can be shown or hidden using the check box below. Otherwise, the name is simply used to identify this particular sparkline column on the Axes page of the graphical table or in edit mode in a text area.

Show name in header

[Only applicable when the sparkline is part of a graphical table.]

Shows or hides the column header.

See also:

Sparkline Settings

What are Sparklines?

How to Use Sparklines

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Sparkline Settings – Data

SparklineSettings-Data.png


Sparkline in Graphical Table

When the sparkline is used in a graphical table, the selection of data table and marking is already done in the Graphical Table Properties - Data page, so these options are not available here. Instead you will get the choice to inherit the data limiting settings or to use separate data limiting:

Option

Description

Data limiting

 

Use data limiting from graphical table

Use this option to inherit the data limiting settings from the graphical table.

Specify separate data limiting

Use this option if you want to specify other limitations for the sparkline column than you have set up for the graphical table.

Sparkline in Text Area

When a sparkline is used in a text area you must specify the data table to work on.

Option

Description

Data table

Specifies the data table on which the visualization will work.

Marking

[Not applicable for sparklines in text area.]

All Sparklines

Option

Description

Limit data using markings

Lists the available markings that can be used to limit what is shown in this dynamic item. This means that the dynamic item only displays data that has been marked in other visualizations.

If more than one marking is selected, you can choose how the data in the markings should be combined.

New...

Opens the New Marking dialog where you can specify a new marking.

The color and name of a previously created marking is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Rows must be included in

Specifies how the data in the markings should be combined if you have selected to limit the data by more than one marking.

   All markings (AND)
  

Use this option if you want this dynamic item to show the intersection of the markings selected in Limit data using markings. This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in both markings. This dynamic item will then show only the data that has been marked using both of the selected markings.

   Any marking (OR)
   

Use this option if you want this dynamic item to show the union of the markings selected in Limit data using markings.

This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in either of the two markings. This dynamic item will then show data that has been marked using either of the selected markings.

Limit data using filterings

Defines how different filtering schemes in the analysis should affect this dynamic item.

Select Use the current filtering from the page if you want the dynamic item to always utilize the filtering scheme that is used on the page where the dynamic item is located. If you move the dynamic item to a new page, then the dynamic item will automatically start reacting on the filtering scheme that is used on the new page.

Select a specific filtering scheme from the list if you want the dynamic item to always use that filtering scheme. Moving the dynamic item to another page with a different filtering scheme will not affect this setting.

If you select to limit data using more than one filtering scheme, the intersection of the filterings will be used. This means that the dynamic item will show only the data that is made visible by all of the filtering schemes.

New...

Opens the New Filtering Scheme dialog where you can specify a new filtering scheme.

The name of a previously created filtering scheme is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Limit data using expression

You can limit what data should be available for a certain dynamic item using an expression. If you have defined a limiting expression, it will be displayed here.

Edit...

Opens the Limit Data Using Expression dialog where you can define an expression to use for limiting the data in this dynamic item.

See also:

Sparkline Settings

What are Sparklines?

How to Use Sparklines

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Sparkline Settings – Appearance

SparklineSettings-Appearance.png


Option

Description

Show Y-axis values for

 

   Start point

Select this check box to display the first Y-axis value for a sparkline.

   End point

Select this check box to display the last Y-axis value for a sparkline.

Y-axis values width

[Only available when the sparkline is used in a graphical table.]

Allows you to specify how many pixels of the total sparkline width to use for the start point or end point values. The total sparkline width can be controlled by dragging the column header edges with the mouse.

Line width

Specifies the width of the sparklines in pixels.

Line color

Specifies the color of the sparklines.

See also:

Sparkline Settings

What are Sparklines?

How to Use Sparklines

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Sparkline Settings – Formatting

SparklineSettings-Formatting.png


Option

Description

Axes

Displays how the Y-axis start point and end point values is formatted.

Reset

Resets the formatting for the selected axis values according to the settings defined on column level. If no column formatting has been set, axis formatting settings defined in the Options dialog will be used. If no settings have been specified in the Options dialog, the default settings for the visualization type will be used.

Category

Lists the available formatting categories for the selected axis. Each category in this list has separate settings. Which categories are available depends on the data type of the selected axis. See Formatting Settings for a full description of all possible options.

See also:

Sparkline Settings

What are Sparklines?

How to Use Sparklines

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Sparkline Settings – Axes

SparklineSettings-Axes.png


Option

Description

X-axis

Specifies the column or hierarchy to be displayed on the X-axis.

Settings...

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog, where you can change the scale mode from categorical to continuous, and vice versa, as well as changing the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

Y-axis

Specifies the column or hierarchy to be displayed on the Y-axis.

Y-axis scale

[Only applicable when the sparkline is part of a graphical table.]

   One scale for all sparklines in this column

Use this option if you want to show the Y-axis values for all sparklines in the graphical table presented using the same scale.

   Multiple scales

 

Use this option to show the Y-axis values for all sparklines using different scales. For example, use it if the data for several categories are of very different magnitudes, and you are interested in seeing the trends for each category rather than how the curves behave relative to each other.

See also:

Sparkline Settings

What are Sparklines?

How to Use Sparklines

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Sparkline Settings – Actions

SparklineSettings-Actions.png


Option

Description

Perform action on click

Select the check box to specify an action that should be performed when clicking on the sparkline. Actions include operations like going to another page, applying a bookmark, a data function or executing a script.

Settings...

Opens the Action Settings dialog where you can specify what should happen when clicking on this sparkline.

In the graphical table, the action is specified for the whole item column. However, if the action is based on a script, then you may obtain different results depending on which cell you click on. See Action Script Examples for more information.

See also:

Sparkline Settings

What are Sparklines?

How to Use Sparklines

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Sparkline Settings – Tooltip

SparklineSettings-Tooltip.png


Option

Description

Display the following values

Specifies what will be shown in the tooltip.

Move Up

Moves the selected value up in the list and, hence, up in the tooltip.

Move Down

Moves the selected value down in the list and, hence, down in the tooltip.

Tooltip format

 

   Value names and values

Shows the tooltip content in a format where the selected column name, hierarchy or custom expression is displayed. For example, Year: 2003, Type: Cucumber, etc.

   Visualization properties and values

Shows the tooltip content in a format where the visualization property for each value is displayed. For example, X: 2003, Color: Cucumber, etc.

See also:

Sparkline Settings

What are Sparklines?

How to Use Sparklines

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Calculated Value

What are Calculated Values?

Calculated values are values derived from some kind of aggregated expression, similar to the data shown in cross tables. They can be displayed in the context of a graphical table or, separately, in a text area.

CalculatedValues1.png

The general idea of calculated values is that they can be included directly where they are needed, in tables or text, in order to provide information at a glance. Calculated values can be set up to change with filtering like any traditional Spotfire visualization or they can be locked to show  fixed values, using the Data page in the Calculated Value Settings dialog.

By adding rules that control the color and font style you can make sure that a value stands out when it falls outside the specified limits:

CalculatedValues2.png

See also:

How to Use Calculated Values

Calculated Value Settings

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

How to Use Calculated Values

Calculated Values can be shown both separately in a text area or be included as a column in a graphical table. The behavior of the calculated value is quite similar in both places, but some differences exist. Therefore, this list of step instructions has been split into three different sections: Graphical table specific information, Text area specific information, and General information applicable to both instances.

Graphical table specific information

When calculated values are included in a graphical table, the settings for the calculated value item normally control a number of separate calculated values, one for each value in the graphical table row axis.

  • To add a calculated values column to a graphical table:

  1. Right-click on the graphical table to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Add > Calculated Value.

    Response: A new calculated value column is added to the graphical table. A first attempt to set up a suitable calculated value is made by the application, but you probably want to adjust the settings.

    Comment: You can also add a new calculated value column by using drag-and-drop. See Drag-and-Drop to learn more. Or, you can add a new calculated value from the Axes page of the Graphical Table Properties dialog.

  3. Right-click on the new column and select Calculated Value Settings from the pop-up menu.

    Comment: Note that each calculated value column added to a graphical table has its own settings.

  4. On the Values page, select a column, hierarchy, or expression in the Calculate values using field.

  5. On the General page, you may want to change the Name of the new column to something that describes what the calculated value shows.

    Comment: You can hide the name from the graphical table by clearing the Show name in header check box. (The entire header row of the graphical table can also be hidden by clearing the Header row check box on the Appearance page of the Graphical Table Properties.)

  6. If desired, make other changes to the default settings, such as changing the filtering scheme on the Data page, adding an action, or setting up a rule, see below.

  7. When you are done, click Close.

  • To remove a calculated values column from a graphical table:

  1. Right-click on the column header of the calculated values column you want to remove.

  2. Select Remove from the pop-up menu.

  • To change the column header for a calculated values column:

  1. Open the Calculated Value Settings dialog and go to the General page.

  2. Type a new Name for the column.

  3. Make sure that the Show name in header check box is selected.

  4. Click Close.

  • To hide the column name from a graphical table:

  1. Open the Calculated Value Settings dialog and go to the General page.

  2. Clear the Show name in header check box.

    Comment: The entire header row of the graphical table can be hidden from the Appearance page of the Graphical Table Properties.

  3. Click Close.

  • To lock the calculated value so it does not react to filtering:

  1. Open the Calculated Value Settings dialog and go to the Data page.

  2. Make sure that the Specify separate data limiting radio button is selected.

  3. Clear all check boxes under Limit data using filterings.

    Comment: You can also select one specific filtering scheme and keep from modifying any of the filters in it.

  4. Click Close.

Text area specific information

Using calculated values in a text area works slightly different from when it is included in a graphical table. Below are some useful tips for working with calculated values in the text area.

  • To add a calculated value to a text area:

  1. Create a text area where you want the calculated value to reside.

  2. Click on the Toggle Edit Mode button, ToggleEditModeButton.png, in the text area title bar to make sure that the text area is in edit mode.

    Comment: You can also right-click and select Edit Text Area from the pop-up menu.

  3. Type some descriptive text in the text area regarding what the calculated value will show.

  4. Click on the Insert Dynamic Item button, InsertDynamicControlButton.png, and select the Calculated Value option.

    Response: The Calculated Value Settings dialog is displayed.

  5. On the Values page, select a column, hierarchy, or expression in the Calculate values using field.

    Comment: If desired, make other changes to the default settings, such as changing the filtering scheme on the Data page, adding an action, or setting up a rule, see below.

  6. Click OK.

    Response: The calculated value is added to the text area.

  • To lock the calculated value so it does not react to filtering:

  1. Open the Calculated Value Settings dialog and go to the Data page.

  2. Clear all check boxes under Limit data using filterings.

    Comment: You can also select one specific filtering scheme and keep from modifying any of the filters in it.

  3. Click OK.

  • To change the font, style and size of calculated values in the text area:

  1. Click on the Toggle Edit Mode button, ToggleEditModeButton.png, in the text area title bar.

  2. Right-click on the calculated value and select Format Control... from the pop-up menu.

    Response: The Format Control dialog is opened.

  3. Adjust the font settings in the dialog to change the appearance of the calculated value to your liking.

  4. Click OK.

    Response: The new font settings are applied to the calculated value.

  5. Click on the Toggle Edit Mode button, ToggleEditModeButton.png, in the text area title bar again.

    Response: The Edit mode is closed and you see the final result.

    Note: The text color cannot be set using the Format Control dialog. Text color is instead defined by rules. See To add a rule for the color or font style below for more information.

    Note: When working with calculated values, make sure you do not unintentionally override any font style settings that have been defined in a rule. If you apply a font style (Bold and Italic) from the Format Control dialog, it will be added to the calculated value on top of any font style included in a rule for the calculated value. For example, if you select the check box for Bold in the Format Control dialog, then the calculated value will always be displayed as bold. A rule stating that the value should be displayed in bold only if the value is greater than a certain value will have no effect, since the calculated value is already displayed in bold.

General information

  • To add actions performed when clicking on the calculated value:

  1. Open the Calculated Value Settings dialog and go to the Actions page.

  2. Select the Perform action on click check box.

  3. Click on Settings....

    Response: The Action Settings dialog is displayed.

  4. Type a good Description explaining what will happen when clicking on the calculated value.

    Comment: The description can be shown in the tooltip for the calculated value.

  5. Add the desired actions and click OK.

  • To add a rule for the color or font style:

Calculated values do not require any rules at all, but they can be used to emphasize a certain value using a color or a different font style.

  1. Open the Calculated Value Settings dialog and go to the Values page.

  2. Click Add Rule....

    Response: The Add Rule dialog is displayed.

  3. Define the Rule type to apply.

  4. Set the Value for the rule.

  5. Specify the Color and Font style to use when the rule is applied.

  6. Click OK.

    Comment: You can add more than one rule. If you add many rules, the rules are prioritized from top to bottom, for each row. None of the rules further down in the list will be considered once a rule higher up in the list has been applied. You can click and drag a rule in the Rules list to change the order.

  • To change the formatting:

  1. Open the Calculated Value Settings dialog and go to the Formatting page.

  2. Click to select the Category of your choice. For example, "Number".

    Response: The settings for the selected category are shown.

  3. Make the desired changes. For example, change the number of decimals shown.

  4. Click Close or OK.

See also:

What are Calculated Values?

Calculated Value Settings

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Calculated Value Settings

The Calculated Value Settings dialog consists of several pages:

  • General

  • Data

  • Formatting

  • Values

  • Actions

  • Tooltip

  • To reach the Calculated Value Settings dialog from a graphical table:

  1. Right-click on the calculated value column in a graphical table visualization.

  2. Select Calculated Value Settings from the pop-up menu.

  • To reach the Calculated Value Settings dialog from a text area:

  1. Click on the Toggle Edit Mode button, ToggleEditModeButton.png, in the text area title bar, to make sure that the text area is in edit mode.

    Comment: You can also right-click and select Edit Text Area from the pop-up menu.

  2. Double-click on the calculated value in the text area.

See also:

What are Calculated Values?

How to Use Calculated Values

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Calculated Value Settings – General

CalculatedValueSettings-General.png


Option

Description

Name

The name of the calculated value. If the calculated value is included in a graphical table, then this name is the column header which can be shown or hidden using the check box below. Otherwise, the name is simply used to identify this particular calculated value column on the Axes page of the graphical table or in edit mode in a text area.

Show name in header

[Only applicable when the calculated value is part of a graphical table.]

Shows or hides the column header.

See also:

Calculated Value Settings

What are Calculated Values?

How to Use Calculated Values

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Calculated Value Settings – Data

CalculatedValueSettings-Data.png


Calculated Value in Graphical Table

When the calculated value is used in a graphical table the selection of data table and marking is already done in the Graphical Table Properties - Data page, so these options are not available here. Instead you will get the choice to inherit the data limiting settings or to use separate data limiting:

Option

Description

Data limiting

 

Use data limiting from graphical table

Use this option to inherit the data limiting settings from the graphical table.

Specify separate data limiting

Use this option if you want to specify other limitations for the calculated value column than you have set up for the graphical table.

Calculated Value in Text Area

When a calculated value is used in a text area you must specify the data table to work on.

Option

Description

Data table

Specifies the data table on which the visualization will work.

Marking

[Not applicable for calculated values in text area.]

All Calculated Values

Option

Description

Limit data using markings

Lists the available markings that can be used to limit what is shown in this dynamic item. This means that the dynamic item only displays data that has been marked in other visualizations.

If more than one marking is selected, you can choose how the data in the markings should be combined.

New...

Opens the New Marking dialog where you can specify a new marking.

The color and name of a previously created marking is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Rows must be included in

Specifies how the data in the markings should be combined if you have selected to limit the data by more than one marking.

   All markings (AND)
  

Use this option if you want this dynamic item to show the intersection of the markings selected in Limit data using markings. This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in both markings. This dynamic item will then show only the data that has been marked using both of the selected markings.

   Any marking (OR)
   

Use this option if you want this dynamic item to show the union of the markings selected in Limit data using markings.

This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in either of the two markings. This dynamic item will then show data that has been marked using either of the selected markings.

Limit data using filterings

Defines how different filtering schemes in the analysis should affect this dynamic item.

Select Use the current filtering from the page if you want the dynamic item to always utilize the filtering scheme that is used on the page where the dynamic item is located. If you move the dynamic item to a new page, then the dynamic item will automatically start reacting on the filtering scheme that is used on the new page.

Select a specific filtering scheme from the list if you want the dynamic item to always use that filtering scheme. Moving the dynamic item to another page with a different filtering scheme will not affect this setting.

If you select to limit data using more than one filtering scheme, the intersection of the filterings will be used. This means that the dynamic item will show only the data that is made visible by all of the filtering schemes.

New...

Opens the New Filtering Scheme dialog where you can specify a new filtering scheme.

The name of a previously created filtering scheme is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Limit data using expression

You can limit what data should be available for a certain dynamic item using an expression. If you have defined a limiting expression, it will be displayed here.

Edit...

Opens the Limit Data Using Expression dialog where you can define an expression to use for limiting the data in this dynamic item.

See also:

Calculated Value Settings

What are Calculated Values?

How to Use Calculated Values

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Calculated Value Settings – Formatting

CalculatedValueSettings-Formatting.png


Option

Description

Axes

Displays how the calculated value is formatted.

Reset

Resets the formatting for the calculated value according to the settings defined on column level. If no column formatting has been set, axis formatting settings defined in the Options dialog will be used. If no settings have been specified in the Options dialog, the default settings for the visualization type will be used.

Category

Lists the available formatting categories for the selected axis (value). Each category in this list has separate settings. Which categories are available depends on the data type of the selected axis. See Formatting Settings for a full description of all possible options.

See also:

What are Calculated Values?

How to Use Calculated Values

Calculated Value Settings

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Calculated Value Settings – Values

CalculatedValueSettings-Values.png


Option

Description

Calculate values using

Select the column and aggregation method to base your calculated value on.

Rules

Lists all defined rules.

If you add many rules, the rules are prioritized from top to bottom. None of the rules further down in the list will be considered once a rule higher up in the list has been applied. You can click and drag a rule in the Rules list to change the order.

Add Rule...

Opens the Add Rule dialog where you can define a rule to control the color and font style for a calculated value. For example, you can define one rule to give the top five items in your data a particular color and another rule to provide a different color for all other rows. See Details on Add/Edit Rule for full descriptions of the rule types.

See also:

What are Calculated Values?

How to Use Calculated Values

Calculated Value Settings

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Calculated Value Settings – Actions

CalculatedValueSettings-Actions.png


Option

Description

Perform action on click

Select the check box to specify an action that should happen when clicking on the calculated value. Actions include operations like going to another page, applying a bookmark, a data function or executing a script.

Settings...

Opens the Action Settings dialog where you can specify what should happen when clicking on this calculated value.

In the graphical table, the action is specified for the whole item column. However, if the action is based on a script, then you may obtain different results depending on which cell you click on. See Action Script Examples for more information.

See also:

Calculated Value Settings

What are Calculated Values?

How to Use Calculated Values

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Calculated Value Settings – Tooltip

CalculatedValueSettings-Tooltip.png


Option

Description

Display the following values

Specifies what will be shown in the tooltip.

Move Up

Moves the selected value up in the list and, hence, up in the tooltip.

Move Down

Moves the selected value down in the list and, hence, down in the tooltip.

Tooltip format

 

   Value names and values

Shows the tooltip content in a format where the selected column name, hierarchy or custom expression is displayed. For example, Year: 2003, Type: Cucumber, etc.

   Visualization properties and values

Shows the tooltip content in a format where the visualization property for each value is displayed. For example, X: 2003, Color: Cucumber, etc.

See also:

Calculated Value Settings

What are Calculated Values?

How to Use Calculated Values

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Details on Add/Edit Rule

DetailsonAdd-EditRule.png


Use these dialogs to define or edit a color rule for a calculated value. This will make sure certain values stand out with a specific color or formatting.

  • To reach the Add/Edit Rule dialog:

  1. In the Calculated Value Settings dialog, go to the Values page.

  2. Click on the Add Rule... button to add a rule. To edit an existing rule, double-click on the rule of interest in the list.

Option

Description

Rule type

Specifies which rule type to add. See below for descriptions of all available rule types.

Value

Defines the value or values the rule should apply to. The available options depend on the rule type selected. See Details on Point/Value Menu for descriptions of all the options in this menu.

Color

Specifies the color to use for the rule.

Font style

Specifies the font style to use for the rule. You can show calculated values using Regular, Bold or Italic font style.

 

Available rule types:

Rule Type

Description

Top

Sets the top number of items to the selected appearance. Specify the number of items to affect in the Value field.

Note: In some cases more than the defined number of items may be affected by a rule. For example, if the rule states that the top three items should be yellow, and four items represent the highest value, then all four of these items will become yellow.

Bottom

Sets the bottom number of items to the selected appearance. Specify the number of items to affect in the Value field.

Note: In some cases more than the defined number of items may be affected by a rule. For example, if the rule states that the bottom three items should be yellow, and four items represent the lowest value, then all four of these items will become yellow.

Between

Sets all the items representing values between the two specified values to the selected appearance. Specify the values in the two Value fields.

Equal to

Sets all the items representing values that are equal to the specified value to the selected appearance.

Not equal to

Sets all the items representing values that are not equal to the specified value to the selected appearance.

Greater than

Sets all the items representing values greater than the specified value to the selected appearance.

Greater than or equal to

Sets all the items representing values greater than or equal to the specified value to the selected appearance.

Less than

Sets all the items representing values less than the specified value to the selected appearance.

Less than or equal to

Sets all the items representing values less than or equal to the specified value to the selected appearance.

Boolean expression

Lets you define a boolean expression. All the items for which the expression is true will get the specified appearance. See To add a boolean expression as a rule for a description. To learn more about custom expressions in general, see Custom Expressions Introduction.

See also:

Calculated Value Settings - Values

Icon

What are Icons?

Icons are small, simple images traditionally used for displaying trends or variations of some variable. They can be displayed in the context of a graphical table or, separately, in a text area. In the example below, the icons are used in a graphical table to show the top, bottom and intermediate sales region of some fictive product:

WhatAreIcons.png

The general idea of icons is that they can be included directly where they are needed, in tables or text, in order to provide information at a glance. Icons can be set up to change with filtering like any traditional Spotfire visualization or they can be locked to show  fixed values, using the Data page in the Icon Settings dialog.

See also:

How to Use Icons

Icon Settings

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

How to Use Icons

Icons can be shown both separately in a text area or be included as a column in a graphical table. The behavior of the icon is quite similar in both places, but some differences exist. Therefore, this list of step instructions has been split into three different sections: Graphical table specific information, Text area specific information, and General information applicable to both instances

Graphical table specific information

When icons are included in a graphical table, the settings for the icon column normally control a number of separate icons, potentially one for each value in the graphical table row axis.

  • To add an icons column to a graphical table:

  1. Right-click on the graphical table to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Add > Icon.

    Response: A new icon column is added to the graphical table. A first attempt to set up a suitable icon is made by the application, but you probably want to adjust the settings.

    Comment: You can also add a new icon column by using drag-and-drop. See Drag-and-Drop to learn more. Or, you can add a new icon from the Axes page of the Graphical Table Properties dialog.

  3. Right-click on the new column and select Icon Settings from the pop-up menu.

    Comment: Note that each icon column added to a graphical table has its own settings.

  4. On the Icons page, select a column, hierarchy, or expression in the Calculate icons using field.

  5. Define one or more rules (see below) to control what icons to show and when.

  6. On the General page, you may want to change the Name of the new column to something that describes what the icon shows.

    Comment: You can hide the name from the graphical table by clearing the Show name in header check box. (The entire header row of the graphical table can also be hidden by clearing the Header row check box on the Appearance page of the Graphical Table Properties.)

  7. If desired, make other changes to the default settings, such as changing the filtering scheme on the Data page, adding an action, etc.

  8. When you are done, click Close.

  • To remove an icon column from a graphical table:

  1. Right-click on the column header of the icon column you want to remove.

  2. Select Remove from the pop-up menu.

  • To change the column header for an icon column:

  1. Open the Icon Settings dialog and go to the General page.

  2. Type a new Name for the column.

  3. Make sure that the Show name in header check box is selected.

  4. Click Close.

  • To hide the column name from a graphical table:

  1. Open the Icon Settings dialog and go to the General page.

  2. Clear the Show name in header check box.

    Comment: The entire header row of the graphical table can be hidden from the Appearance page of the Graphical Table Properties.

  3. Click Close.

  • To lock the icon column so it does not react to filtering:

  1. Open the Icon Settings dialog and go to the Data page.

  2. Make sure that the Specify separate data limiting radio button is selected.

  3. Clear all check boxes under Limit data using filterings.

    Comment: You can also select one filtering scheme and keep from modifying any of the filters in it.

  4. Click Close.

Text area specific information

When an icon is used in a text area it behaves slightly different from when it is included in a graphical table. For example, you will not get instant feedback to your changes since the icon does not show up until you leave the edit mode. However, the placement of the edit box tells you where in the text area the icon will show up. Below are some useful tips for working with icons in the text area.

  • To add an icon to a text area:

  1. Create a text area where you want the icon to reside.

  2. Click on the Toggle Edit Mode button, ToggleEditModeButton.png, in the text area title bar to make sure that the text area is in edit mode.

    Comment: You can also right-click and select Edit Text Area from the pop-up menu.

  3. Type some descriptive text in the text area regarding what the icon will show.

  4. Click on the Insert Dynamic Item button,InsertDynamicControlButton.png, and select the Icon option.

    Response: The Icon Settings dialog is displayed.

  5. On the Icons page, select a column, hierarchy, or expression in the Calculate icons using field.

  6. Define one or more rules (see below) to control what icons to show and when.

    Comment: If desired, make other changes to the default settings, such as changing the filtering scheme on the Data page, adding an action, etc.

  7. Click OK.

    Response: The icon is added to the text area. Exit edit mode to view the final result.

  • To change the size of the icon in a text area:

  1. Click on the Toggle Edit Mode button, ToggleEditModeButton.png, in the text area title bar to make sure that the text area is in edit mode.

    Response: The outline of the icon is shown as a gray box.

  2. Click on the gray edit box to select it and drag either of the corners to resize the box.

    Comment: The size slider within the Icons page of the Icon Settings dialog can only resize the icon within the current edit box. If the slider is set to Max, then the edit box limit will be the limit of the icon. If the slider is set to Min, then the icon will be small, even if the edit box is made larger. Hence, it is recommended that the slider in the Settings dialog is used only for fine tuning the size of really small icons.

  3. Click on the Toggle Edit Mode button, ToggleEditModeButton.png, in the text area title bar again.

    Response: The Edit mode is closed and you see the final result.

    Comment: You can always reset the size of the icon to the original size if you change your mind. Just open the Format Control dialog by right-clicking on the gray box, click on the Reset button and then OK, and the size will be reset.

  • To lock the icon so it does not react to filtering:

  1. Open the Icon Settings dialog and go to the Data page.

  2. Clear all check boxes under Limit data using filterings.

    Comment: You can also select one filtering scheme and keep from modifying any of the filters in it.

  3. Click OK.

General information

  • To add actions performed when clicking on the icon:

  1. Open the Icon Settings dialog and go to the Actions page.

  2. Select the Perform action on click check box.

  3. Click on Settings....

    Response: The Action Settings dialog is displayed.

  4. Type a good Description explaining what will happen when clicking on the icon.

    Comment: The description can be shown in the tooltip for the icon.

  5. Add the desired actions and click OK.

  • To add a rule defining the color and shape:

Icons need at least one defined rule for anything to be visible. It is the rules that determine what to display and when.

  1. Open the Icon Settings dialog and go to the Icons page.

  2. Click Add Rule....

    Response: The Add Rule dialog is displayed.

  3. Define the Rule type to apply.

  4. Set the Value for the rule.

  5. Specify the Color and Shape to use when the rule is applied.

  6. Click OK.

    Comment: You can add more than one rule. If you add many rules, the rules are prioritized from top to bottom. You can click and drag a rule in the Rules list to change the order.

See also:

What are Icons?

Icon Settings

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Icon Settings

The Icon Settings dialog consists of several pages:

  • General

  • Data

  • Icons

  • Actions

  • Tooltip

  • To reach the Icon Settings dialog from a graphical table:

  1. Right-click on the icon column in a graphical table visualization.

  2. Select Icon Settings from the pop-up menu.

  • To reach the Icon Settings dialog from a text area:

  1. Click on the Toggle Edit Mode button, ToggleEditModeButton.png, in the text area title bar, to make sure that the text area is in edit mode.

    Comment: You can also right-click and select Edit Text Area from the pop-up menu.

  2. Double-click on the gray edit box representing the desired icon in the text area.

See also:

What are Icons?

How to Use Icons

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Icon Settings – General

IconSettings-General.png


Option

Description

Name

The name of the icon. If the icon is included in a graphical table, then this name is the column header which can be shown or hidden using the check box below. Otherwise, the name is simply used to identify this particular icon column on the Axes page of the graphical table or in edit mode in a text area.

Show name in header

[Only applicable when the icon is part of a graphical table.]

Shows or hides the column header.

See also:

What are Icons?

How to Use Icons

Icon Settings

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Icon Settings – Data

IconSettings-Data.png


Icon in Graphical Table

When the icon is used in a graphical table the selection of data table and marking is already done in the Graphical Table Properties - Data page, so these options are not available here. Instead you will get the choice to inherit the data limiting settings or to use separate data limiting:

Option

Description

Data limiting

 

Use data limiting from graphical table

Use this option to inherit the data limiting settings from the graphical table.

Specify separate data limiting

Use this option if you want to specify other limitations for the icon column than you have set up for the graphical table.

Icon in Text Area

When an icon is used in a text area you must specify the data table to work on.

Option

Description

Data table

Specifies the data table on which the visualization will work.

Marking

[Not applicable for icons in text area.]

All Icons

Option

Description

Limit data using markings

Lists the available markings that can be used to limit what is shown in this dynamic item. This means that the dynamic item only displays data that has been marked in other visualizations.

If more than one marking is selected, you can choose how the data in the markings should be combined.

New...

Opens the New Marking dialog where you can specify a new marking.

The color and name of a previously created marking is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Rows must be included in

Specifies how the data in the markings should be combined if you have selected to limit the data by more than one marking.

   All markings (AND)
  

Use this option if you want this dynamic item to show the intersection of the markings selected in Limit data using markings. This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in both markings. This dynamic item will then show only the data that has been marked using both of the selected markings.

   Any marking (OR)
   

Use this option if you want this dynamic item to show the union of the markings selected in Limit data using markings.

This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in either of the two markings. This dynamic item will then show data that has been marked using either of the selected markings.

Limit data using filterings

Defines how different filtering schemes in the analysis should affect this dynamic item.

Select Use the current filtering from the page if you want the dynamic item to always utilize the filtering scheme that is used on the page where the dynamic item is located. If you move the dynamic item to a new page, then the dynamic item will automatically start reacting on the filtering scheme that is used on the new page.

Select a specific filtering scheme from the list if you want the dynamic item to always use that filtering scheme. Moving the dynamic item to another page with a different filtering scheme will not affect this setting.

If you select to limit data using more than one filtering scheme, the intersection of the filterings will be used. This means that the dynamic item will show only the data that is made visible by all of the filtering schemes.

New...

Opens the New Filtering Scheme dialog where you can specify a new filtering scheme.

The name of a previously created filtering scheme is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Limit data using expression

You can limit what data should be available for a certain dynamic item using an expression. If you have defined a limiting expression, it will be displayed here.

Edit...

Opens the Limit Data Using Expression dialog where you can define an expression to use for limiting the data in this dynamic item.

See also:

Icon Settings

What are Icons?

How to Use Icons

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Icon Settings – Icons

IconSettings-Icons.png


Option

Description

Calculate icons using

Select the column and aggregation method to base your icon calculations on.

Rules

Lists all defined rules.

If you add many rules, the rules are prioritized from top to bottom. None of the rules further down in the list will be considered once a rule higher up in the list has been applied. You can click and drag a rule in the Rules list to change the order.

Add Rule...

Opens the Add Rule dialog where you can define a rule to control when a row should display a certain icon. For example, you can define one rule to give the top five items in your data a particular icon and another rule to provide a different icon for all other rows. See Details on Add/Edit Rule for full descriptions of the rule types.

Icon size

Controls the size of the icon within the current boundaries. If icons are used within a graphical table, then the max size is limited by the row height of the graphical table. If an icon is added to a text area, then the max size is limited by the size of the gray edit box. That size can be modified by dragging the edit box of the icon when in edit mode.

Alignment

[Only applicable when icons are used in a graphical table.]

Aligns the icon header and the icons to the Left, Right or Center in the graphical table column.

See also:

What are Icons?

How to Use Icons

Icon Settings

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Icon Settings – Actions

IconSettings-Actions.png


Option

Description

Perform action on click

Select the check box to specify an action that should happen when clicking on the icon. Actions include operations like going to another page, applying a bookmark, a data function or executing a script.

Settings...

Opens the Action Settings dialog where you can specify what should happen when clicking on this icon.

In the graphical table, the action is specified for the whole item column. However, if the action is based on a script, then you may obtain different results depending on which cell you click on. See Action Script Examples for more information.

See also:

Icon Settings

What are Icons?

How to Use Icons

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Icon Settings – Tooltip

IconSettings-Tooltip.png


Option

Description

Display the following values

Specifies what will be shown in the tooltip.

Move Up

Moves the selected value up in the list and, hence, up in the tooltip.

Move Down

Moves the selected value down in the list and, hence, down in the tooltip.

Tooltip format

 

   Value names and values

Shows the tooltip content in a format where the selected column name, hierarchy or custom expression is displayed. For example, Year: 2003, Type: Cucumber, etc.

   Visualization properties and values

Shows the tooltip content in a format where the visualization property for each value is displayed. For example, X: 2003, Color: Cucumber, etc.

See also:

Icon Settings

What are Icons?

How to Use Icons

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Details on Add/Edit Rule

Use these dialogs to define or edit an icon rule.

  • To reach the Add/Edit Rule dialog:

  1. In the Icon Settings dialog, go to the Icons page.

  2. Click on the Add Rule... button to add a rule. To edit an existing rule, double-click on the rule of interest in the list.

AddRule1.png

Option

Description

Rule type

Specifies which rule type to add. See below for descriptions of all available rule types.

Value

Defines the value or values the rule should apply to. The available options depend on the rule type selected. See Details on Point/Value Menu for descriptions of all the options in this menu.

Color

Specifies the color of the icon.

Shape

Specifies the shape of the icon.

 

Available rule types:

Rule Type

Description

Top

Adds an icon of the selected appearance to the rows of the top number of items. Specify the number of items to affect in the Value field.

Note: In some cases more than the defined number of items may be affected. For example, if the rule states that the top three items should be indicated using a yellow star, and four items represent the highest value, then all four of these items will get the yellow star.

Bottom

Adds an icon of the selected appearance to the rows of the bottom number of items. Specify the number of items to affect in the Value field.

Note: In some cases more than the defined number of items may be affected. For example, if the rule states that the bottom three items should be indicated using a red star, and four items represent the lowest value, then all four of these items will get the red star.

Between

Adds an icon of the selected appearance to all the items representing values between the two specified values. Specify the values in the two Value fields.

Equal to

Adds an icon of the selected appearance to all the items representing values that are equal to the specified value.

Not equal to

Adds an icon of the selected appearance to all the items representing values that are not equal to the specified value.

Greater than

Adds an icon of the selected appearance to all the items representing values greater than the specified value.

Greater than or equal to

Adds an icon of the selected appearance to all the items representing values greater than or equal to the specified value.

Less than

Adds an icon of the selected appearance to all the items representing values less than the specified value.

Less than or equal to

Adds an icon of the selected appearance to all the items representing values less than or equal to the specified value.

Boolean expression

Lets you define a boolean expression. All the items for which the expression is true will get the an icon of the selected appearance. See To add a boolean expression as a rule for a description. To learn more about custom expressions in general, see Custom Expressions Introduction.

See also:

Icon Settings - Icons

Bullet Graph

What are Bullet Graphs?

Bullet graphs are used to compare one value, represented by a horizontal bar, to another value, represented by a vertical line, and relate those to qualitative ranges.

BulletGraphs1.png

Bullet graphs can be displayed in the context of a graphical table or, separately, in a text area. In the example below, the bullet graph resides in a graphical table:

BulletGraphs2.png

It compares sales performance for spices in different regions this year to sales performance last year. The background color ranges are qualitative ranges. In the example above they may for example indicate that if the bar is within the leftmost color range, sales performance is poor, while if it is within the rightmost color range, sales performance is good.

In the text area, the bullet graph can be displayed with a scale, as seen below:

BulletGraphs3.png

The general idea of bullet graphs is that they can be included directly where they are needed, in tables or text, in order to provide information at a glance. Bullet graphs can be set up to change with filtering like any traditional Spotfire visualization or they can be locked to show fixed values, using the Data page in the Bullet Graph Settings dialog.

See also:

How to Use Bullet Graphs

Bullet Graph Settings

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

How to Use Bullet Graphs

Bullet Graphs can be shown both separately in a text area or be included as a column in a graphical table. The behavior of the bullet graph is quite similar in both places, but some differences exist. Therefore, this list of step instructions has been split into three different sections: Graphical table specific information, Text area specific information, and General information applicable to both instances.

Graphical table specific information

When bullet graphs are included in a graphical table, the settings for the bullet graph item normally control a number of separate bullet graphs, one for each value in the graphical table row axis.

  • To add a bullet graph column to a graphical table:

  1. Right-click on the graphical table to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Add > Bullet Graph.

    Response: A new bullet graph column is added to the graphical table. A first attempt to set up a suitable bullet graph is made by the application, but you probably want to adjust the settings.

    Comment: You can also add a new bullet graph column by using drag-and-drop. See Drag-and-Drop to learn more. Or, you can add a new bullet graph from the Axes page of the Graphical Table Properties dialog.

  3. Right-click on the new column and select Bullet Graph Settings from the pop-up menu.

    Comment: Note that each bullet graph column added to a graphical table has its own settings.

  4. On the Bullet Graphs page, select a column or expression in the Calculate values using field.

    Comment: This is the horizontal bar in the bullet graph.

  5. Select a column or expression in the Calculate comparative values using field. If you do not want to use a comparative value, select Remove in the column selector.

    Comment: This is the vertical line in the bullet graph, sometimes also referred to as the target value.

  6. If desired, change the Color of the bar and/or vertical line.

  7. On the General page, you may want to change the Name of the new column to something that describes the bullet graph content.

    Comment: You can hide the name from the graphical table by clearing the Show name in header check box. (The entire header row of the graphical table can also be hidden by clearing the Header row check box on the Appearance page of the Graphical Table Properties.)

  8. If desired, make other changes to the default settings, such as changing the filtering scheme on the Data page, adding color ranges, or an action, see below.

  9. When you are done, click Close.

  • To remove a bullet graph column from a graphical table:

  1. Right-click on the column header of the bullet graph column you want to remove.

  2. Select Remove from the pop-up menu.

  • To change the column header for a bullet graph column:

  1. Open the Bullet Graph Settings dialog on the General page by right-clicking on the bullet graph column header and select Bullet Graph Settings from the pop-up menu.

  2. Type a new Name for the column.

  3. Make sure that the Show name in header check box is selected.

  4. Click Close.

  • To hide the column name from a graphical table:

  1. Open the Bullet Graph Settings dialog on the General page by right-clicking on the bullet graph column header and select Bullet Graph Settings from the pop-up menu.

  2. Clear the Show name in header check box.

    Comment: The entire header row of the graphical table can be hidden from the Appearance page of the Graphical Table Properties.

  3. Click Close.

  • To lock the bullet graph so it does not react to filtering:

  1. Open the Bullet Graph Settings dialog and go to the Data page.

  2. Make sure that the Specify separate data limiting radio button is selected.

  3. Clear all check boxes under Limit data using filterings.

    Comment: You can also select one specific filtering scheme and keep from modifying any of the filters in it.

  4. Click Close.

Text area specific information

When a bullet graph is used in a text area it works slightly different from when it is included in a graphical table. For example, you will not get instant feedback to your setting changes since the bullet graph does not show up until you leave the edit mode. However, the placement of the edit box tells you where in the text area the bullet graph will show up. Below are some useful tips for working with bullet graphs in the text area.

  • To add a bullet graph to a text area:

  1. Create a text area where you want the bullet graph to reside.

  2. Click on the Toggle Edit Mode button, ToggleEditModeButton.png, in the text area title bar to make sure that the text area is in edit mode.

    Comment: You can also right-click and select Edit Text Area from the pop-up menu.

  3. Type some descriptive text in the text area regarding what the bullet graph will show.

  4. Click on the Insert Dynamic Item button, InsertDynamicControlButton.png, and select the Bullet Graph option.

    Response: The Bullet Graph Settings dialog is displayed.

  5. Go to the Bullet Graphs page.

  6. In theCalculate values usingfield, select a column or expression to define the horizontal bar in the bullet graph.

  7. Select a column or expression in the Calculate comparative values using field, to define the vertical line in the bullet graph. If you do not want to use a comparative value, select Remove in the column selector.

  8. If desired, change the Color of the bar and/or vertical line.

  9. If desired, make other changes to the default settings, such as changing the filtering scheme on the Data page, adding color ranges, or an action, see below.

  10. When you are done, click OK.

    Response: The bullet graph is added to the text area. Exit edit mode to view the final result.

  • To resize the bullet graph in a text area:

  1. Click on the Toggle Edit Mode button, ToggleEditModeButton.png, in the text area title bar to make sure that the text area is in edit mode. You can also right-click and select Edit Text Area from the pop-up menu.

    Response: The outline of the bullet graph is shown as a gray box.

  2. Click on the gray edit box to select it and drag either of the corners to resize the box.

  3. Click on the Toggle Edit Mode button, ToggleEditModeButton.png, in the text area title bar again, or click outside the text area in any other visualization to leave the Edit mode.

    Response: The final result is shown in the text area.

    Comment: You can always reset the size of the bullet graph to the original size if you change your mind. Just open the Format Control dialog by right-clicking on the gray box, click on the Reset button and then OK, and the size will be reset.

  • To lock the bullet graph so it does not react to filtering:

  1. Open the Bullet Graph Settings dialog and go to the Data page.

  2. Clear all check boxes under Limit data using filterings.

    Comment: You can also select one specific filtering scheme and keep from modifying any of the filters in it.

  3. Click OK.

General information

  • To add color ranges to the bullet graph:

You can add color ranges to a bullet graph in order to define, for instance, within which range performance is considered to be good enough. In the example below, color ranges have been added to indicate that if the bar is within the leftmost range, then performance is below what is acceptable, but as long as the bar is within the rightmost range it is OK.

BulletGraphs4.png

  1. Open the Bullet Graph Settings dialog and go to the Color Ranges page.

  2. Select the Show color ranges check box to enable the settings: the Add button, a color selector, BulletGraphs5.png , and an empty text field.

    Response: One single color range will be displayed in the bullet graph.

  3. Click the Add button to add another color range.

    Response: A column selector appears, and below it, another color selector with an empty text field.

  4. In the column selector, define the value that should be the limit between the added color range and the one above it. You can choose a column directly from the column selector. Or, you can right-click to open the Custom Expression dialog and specify an expression to use.

    Comment: The start value of the first color range will automatically be the lowest value of the bullet graph scale, and the end value of the last color range will automatically be the highest value of the scale.

    Tip: If you want to use a specific value or percentage as the limit between the color ranges, see Tips for common setups of color ranges.

  5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each color range you want to add.

    Comment: A new color range is always added last in the list of existing color ranges in the dialog.

  6. Optionally, enter descriptive texts for the color ranges in the text fields. The texts can be shown in the tooltip for the bullet graph.

  • To remove a color range from the bullet graph:

  1. Open the Bullet Graph Settings dialog and go to the Color Ranges page.

  2. Click on the button, BulletGraphs6.png , to the right of the color range you want to remove.

    Response: The color range is removed from the bullet graph, and the corresponding controls are removed from the dialog.

  • To add actions performed when clicking on the bullet graph:

  1. Open the Bullet Graph Settings dialog and go to the Actions page.

  2. Select the Perform action on click check box.

  3. Click on Settings....

    Response: The Action Settings dialog is displayed.

  4. Type a good Description explaining what will happen when clicking on the bullet graph.

    Comment: The description can be shown in the tooltip for the bullet graph.

  5. Add the desired actions and click OK.

See also:

What are Bullet Graphs?

Bullet Graph Settings

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Bullet Graph Settings

The Bullet Graph Settings dialog consists of several pages:

  • General

  • Data

  • Formatting (only available for bullet graphs in the text area)

  • Bullet Graphs

  • Color Ranges

  • Actions

  • Tooltip

  • To reach the Bullet Graph Settings dialog from a graphical table:

  1. Right-click on the bullet graph column in a graphical table visualization.

  2. Select Bullet Graph Settings from the pop-up menu.

  • To reach the Bullet Graph Settings dialog from a text area:

  1. Click on the Toggle Edit Mode button, ToggleEditModeButton.png, in the text area title bar, to make sure that the text area is in edit mode.

    Comment: You can also right-click and select Edit Text Area from the pop-up menu.

  2. Double-click on the gray edit box representing the desired bullet graph in the text area.

See also:

What are Bullet Graphs?

How to Use Bullet Graphs

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Bullet Graph Settings – General

BulletGraphSettings–General.png


Option

Description

Name

The name of the bullet graph. If the bullet graph is included in a graphical table, then this name is the column header which can be shown or hidden using the check box below. Otherwise, the name is simply used to identify this particular bullet graph column on the Axes page of the graphical table or in edit mode in a text area.

Show name in header

[Only applicable when the bullet graph is part of a graphical table.]

Shows or hides the column header.

See also:

Bullet Graph Settings

What are Bullet Graphs?

How to Use Bullet Graphs

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Bullet Graph Settings – Data

BulletGraphSettings–Data.png


Bullet Graph in Graphical Table

When the bullet graph is used in a graphical table, the selection of data table and marking is already done in the Graphical Table Properties - Data page, so these options are not available here. Instead you will get the choice to inherit the data limiting settings or to use separate data limiting:

Option

Description

Data limiting

 

Use data limiting from graphical table

Use this option to inherit the data limiting settings from the graphical table.

Specify separate data limiting

Use this option if you want to specify other limitations for the bullet graph column than the ones you have set up for the graphical table.

Bullet Graph in Text Area

When a bullet graph is used in a text area you must specify the data table to work on.

Option

Description

Data table

Specifies the data table on which the visualization will work.

Marking

[Not applicable for bullet graphs in text area.]

All Bullet Graphs

Option

Description

Limit data using markings

Lists the available markings that can be used to limit what is shown in this dynamic item. This means that the dynamic item only displays data that has been marked in other visualizations.

If more than one marking is selected, you can choose how the data in the markings should be combined.

New...

Opens the New Marking dialog where you can specify a new marking.

The color and name of a previously created marking is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Rows must be included in

Specifies how the data in the markings should be combined if you have selected to limit the data by more than one marking.

   All markings (AND)
  

Use this option if you want this dynamic item to show the intersection of the markings selected in Limit data using markings. This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in both markings. This dynamic item will then show only the data that has been marked using both of the selected markings.

   Any marking (OR)
   

Use this option if you want this dynamic item to show the union of the markings selected in Limit data using markings.

This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in either of the two markings. This dynamic item will then show data that has been marked using either of the selected markings.

Limit data using filterings

Defines how different filtering schemes in the analysis should affect this dynamic item.

Select Use the current filtering from the page if you want the dynamic item to always utilize the filtering scheme that is used on the page where the dynamic item is located. If you move the dynamic item to a new page, then the dynamic item will automatically start reacting on the filtering scheme that is used on the new page.

Select a specific filtering scheme from the list if you want the dynamic item to always use that filtering scheme. Moving the dynamic item to another page with a different filtering scheme will not affect this setting.

If you select to limit data using more than one filtering scheme, the intersection of the filterings will be used. This means that the dynamic item will show only the data that is made visible by all of the filtering schemes.

New...

Opens the New Filtering Scheme dialog where you can specify a new filtering scheme.

The name of a previously created filtering scheme is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Limit data using expression

You can limit what data should be available for a certain dynamic item using an expression. If you have defined a limiting expression, it will be displayed here.

Edit...

Opens the Limit Data Using Expression dialog where you can define an expression to use for limiting the data in this dynamic item.

See also:

Bullet Graph Settings

What are Bullet Graphs?

How to Use Bullet Graphs

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Bullet Graph Settings – Formatting

BulletGraphSettings–Formatting.png


Note: The settings on the Formatting page are only applicable for bullet graphs in the text area.

Option

Description

Axes

Displays how the values on the bullet graph scale are formatted.

Reset

Resets the formatting for the values according to the settings defined on column level. If no column formatting has been set, axis formatting settings defined in the Options dialog will be used. If no settings have been specified in the Options dialog, the default settings for the visualization type will be used.

Category

Lists the available formatting categories for the selected axis. Each category in this list has separate settings. Which categories are available depends on the data type of the selected axis. See Formatting Settings for a full description of all possible options.

See also:

Bullet Graph Settings

What are Bullet Graphs?

How to Use Bullet Graphs

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Bullet Graph Settings – Bullet Graphs

BulletGraphSettings–BulletGraphs.png


Bullet Graph in Graphical Table

Option

Description

Calculate values using

Specifies the column, hierarchy, or expression you want the horizontal bar in the bullet graph to be based on.

   Color

Specifies the color of the horizontal bar in the bullet graph.

Calculate comparative values using

Specifies the column, hierarchy, or expression you want the vertical line representing the comparative value in the bullet graph to be based on.

   Color

Specifies the color of the vertical line representing the comparative value.

Scaling

 

   One scale for all bullet graphs in this column

Use this option if you want all the bullet graphs in this column of the graphical table to use the same scale.

Multiple scales

Use this option if you want each bullet graph in this column to use its own individual scaling.

Range

 

   Min

Determines the lower value of the scale range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently lowest value in the filtered data.

   Max

Determines the upper value of the scale range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently highest value in the filtered data.

   Set to Current Range

Sets the scale range to the currently filtered values.

   Include origin

Always includes the value 0 in the bullet graph, regardless of filtering.

Scale

 

   Reverse scale

Reverses the current sort order on the scale.

Bullet Graph in Text Area

BulletGraphSettings–BulletGraphs1.png

Option

Description

Calculate values using

Specifies the column, hierarchy, or expression you want the horizontal bar in the bullet graph to be based on.

   Color

Specifies the color of the horizontal bar in the bullet graph.

Calculate comparative values using

Specifies the column, hierarchy, or expression you want the vertical line representing the comparative value in the bullet graph to be based on.

   Color

Specifies the color of the vertical line representing the comparative value.

Range

 

   Min

Determines the lower value of the scale range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently lowest value in the filtered data.

   Max

Determines the upper value of the scale range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently highest value in the filtered data.

   Set to Current Range

Sets the scale range to the currently filtered values.

   Include origin

Always includes the value 0 in the bullet graph, regardless of filtering.

Scale labels

 

   Show labels

Specifies whether or not scale labels should be visible.

      Horizontally

Shows scale labels horizontally.

      Vertically
     

Shows scale labels vertically.

      Max number of labels

Select the check box to specify a maximum number of scale labels to be shown. Limiting the number of labels can improve readability on scales with many values.

Scale

 

   Reverse scale

Reverses the current sort order on the scale.

See also:

Bullet Graph Settings

What are Bullet Graphs?

How to Use Bullet Graphs

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Bullet Graph Settings – Color Ranges

BulletGraphSettings–ColorRanges.png


Option

Description

Show color ranges

Select this check box if you want to display qualitative color ranges in the bullet graph. When the check box is selected, the controls in the lower part of the dialog becomes enabled.

Add

Click to add a new color range.

Note: Before you have added any color ranges, the dialog will only show one color selector with a text field next to it because no limits have been defined yet. In the bullet graph visualization only one color will be displayed at this point, ranging from the lowest value on the scale to the highest value. As soon as you click the Add button, a column selector will appear below the color selector and the text field, and below the column selector another color selector with text field will appear. For each new color range you add, a new set of these three controls (column selector, color selector, and text field) are added below the last color range in the list.

Current ranges and their limits

Lists all the currently added color ranges.

BulletGraphs5.png

[Color selector]

Select a color to use for the color range.

(Type to name this range)

Optionally, you can enter a name for the color range. The name of the color range can be displayed in the tooltip.

BulletGraphs7.png

[Column selector]

Select a column, or enter an expression, that you want to use as the limit between the color range segments.

Tip: If you want to use a specific value or percentage, see below.

Note: The first color range in the list of Current ranges and their limits will automatically start from the lowest value on the bullet graph scale and range to the first limit. And likewise, the last color range in the list will automatically range to the highest value on the scale.

BulletGraphs6.png

[Remove button]

Click to remove a color range.

Note: This will remove the column selector to the left of the button from the dialog, as well as the color selector and text field directly below the column selector.

Tips for common setups of color ranges

Color ranges showing specific values:

You can set the limit between two color ranges to a specific value if you do not want it to be calculated from a column. For example, if you want to use the value 1500, just open the Custom Expression dialog by right-clicking on the column selector representing the limit you want to set, then enter 1500 in the Expression field, and click OK to close the dialog. The value will be displayed in the column selector, and be used as the limit between the two color ranges.

Color ranges showing percentage:

You can also set up the color ranges to represent percentage. Perhaps you have a bullet graph showing this year's total sales compared to a target value, and you want to compare these two values with sales last year, by setting up the color ranges to show percentage of last year's sales as seen below:

BulletGraphs8.png

To achieve this, set up the bullet graph with three color ranges as described in How to Use Bullet Graphs. For the limit between the first and the second color range, open the Custom Expression dialog and enter the expression Sum([Sales Last Year]) * 0.25. And for the limit between the second and the third color range, enter the expression Sum([Sales Last Year]) * 0.75. Click OK to close the dialog. The expression will now be displayed in the column selector, and the limits between the color ranges will use the specified percentage.

See also:

Bullet Graph Settings

What are Bullet Graphs?

How to Use Bullet Graphs

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Bullet Graph Settings – Actions

BulletGraphSettings–Actions.png


Option

Description

Perform action on click

Select the check box to specify an action that should be performed when clicking on the bullet graph. Actions include operations like going to another page, applying a bookmark, a data function or executing a script.

Settings...

Opens the Action Settings dialog where you can specify what should happen when clicking on this bullet graph.

In the graphical table, the action is specified for the whole item column. However, if the action is based on a script, then you may obtain different results depending on which cell you click on. See Action Script Examples for more information.

See also:

Bullet Graph Settings

What are Bullet Graphs?

How to Use Bullet Graphs

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Bullet Graph Settings – Tooltip

BulletGraphSettings–Tooltip.png


Option

Description

Display the following values

Specifies what will be shown in the tooltip.

Move Up

Moves the selected value up in the list and, hence, up in the tooltip.

Move Down

Moves the selected value down in the list and, hence, down in the tooltip.

Tooltip format

 

   Value names and values

Shows the tooltip content in a format where the selected column name, hierarchy or custom expression is displayed.
For example, Sum(Sales): 32642, Region: East, etc.

   Visualization properties and values

Shows the tooltip content in a format where the visualization property for each value is displayed.
For example, Value: 32642, Rows: East, etc.

See also:

Bullet Graph Settings

What are Bullet Graphs?

How to Use Bullet Graphs

What is a Graphical Table?

How to Use the Graphical Table

Bar Chart

What is a Bar Chart?


A bar chart is a way of summarizing a set of categorical data (continuous data can be made categorical by auto-binning). The bar chart displays data using a number of bars, each representing a particular category. The height of each bar is proportional to a specific aggregation (for example the sum of the values in the category it represents). The categories could be something like an age group or a geographical location. It is also possible to color or split each bar into another categorical column in the data, which enables you to see the contribution from different categories to each bar or group of bars in the bar chart.

Example:

The bar chart below shows the total sum of sales for fruits and vegetables over three years.

WhatisaBarChart1.png

The bars are colored by the Category column, which contains two values: Fruit and Vegetables. You can also view these color categories side-by-side as in the bar chart below. Right-click in the visualization and select Side-by-Side Bars from the pop-up menu to get this appearance.

WhatisaBarChart2.png

Another way to get a similar appearance is to add the column Category to the category axis to create a hierarchy on that axis. See Hierarchies to learn more about multiple columns on an axis.

If you prefer the bars to be displayed horizontally, right-click in the visualization and select Horizontal Bars from the pop-up menu.

WhatisaBarChart3.png

Note that in some cases the category axis is referred to as X-axis, and the value axis is referred to as Y-axis. This is the case in some lines and curves, for example, as well as in OVER statements in custom expressions.

All visualizations can be set up to show data limited by one or more markings in other visualizations only (details visualizations). Bar charts can also be limited by one or more filterings. Another alternative is to set up a bar chart without any filtering at all. See Limiting What is Shown in Visualizations for more information.

See also:

How to use the Bar Chart

Bar Chart Properties

How to Use the Bar Chart


  • To apply coloring:

  1. In the Filters panel, click and hold the left mouse button on the filter representing the column you want to color by.

    Comment: Coloring is also available in the Visualization Properties dialog. The color of marked items is changed under Edit > Document Properties.

  2. Drag the filter to the center of the visualization.

    Response: Drop targets appear in the middle of the visualization.

  3. Release the mouse button on the Color target.

    Response: The bars are colored with one color for each category in the selected column.

    Comment: To learn more about coloring in Spotfire, see Coloring Overview.

  • To sort the bar chart:

  1. Right-click in the visualization to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Properties.

  3. Go to the Appearance page.

  4. Select the Sort bars by value check box.

    Response: The bars are sorted according to the summarized value for each bar.

    Comment: Go to the Category Axis page in the Visualization Properties dialog and select Reverse scale if you want the reversed order of the bars.

  • To change orientation of the bars:

  1. Right-click in the bar chart to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Vertical Bars or Horizontal Bars depending on the current orientation of the bars.

    Response: The orientation of the bars is now changed according to your selection.

  • To change the aggregation type:

  1. Click on the axis selector on the value axis. This is where it says Sum([Column Name]), Count(...), or similarly.

    Response: A drop-down menu appears.

  2. Select Aggregation > and a new aggregation measure from the submenu.

    Comment: You can also right-click on the axis selector and select Custom Expression... from the menu to create your own expression.

    Response: The bar chart is updated to show the new information.

  • To auto-bin a continuous category axis:

If you have a column containing values that can be interpreted as continuous values, such as an "Age" column, but you want to display bars for a number of age groups instead, you can use the auto-binning function.

  1. Put the desired continuous column on the category axis.

  2. Right-click on the column selector and select Auto-bin Column from the pop-up menu.

    Response: Spotfire automatically creates a number of bins in which the values are placed.

  3. If desired, use the binning slider to change the number of bins used in the visualization.

    Comment: You can also right-click on the column selector and select Number of Bins... to enter an exact number of bins on the category axis.

  • To use multiple columns on the value axis:

This is an example of how to use two columns on the value axis. Each column will be represented by a bar.

  1. Click on the arrow next to the plus sign on the value axis.

  2. Select a new column from the menu.
    Comment: A column can also be dragged and dropped from the filters panel.

  3. Select (Column Names) in the category axis column selector.
    Response: The two bars appear on the category axis.
    Comment: For more information on (Column Names), see the Non-Column Selections page.

  • To split stacked bars:

This is an example of how you can split the bars in a visualization to display side-by-side bars instead of stacked bars.

  1. Create a bar chart with one numerical column on the value axis (e.g., Sales), one categorical column on the category axis (e.g., Year), and one categorical column to color by (e.g., Category).

    Response: A stacked bar chart with the sum of the numerical column (Sales) per category axis category (Year) is displayed.

  2. Right-click and select Side-by-Side Bars from the pop-up menu.

  3. Response: Each color category is now presented as a separate bar.
    Comment: You could also have kept the Stacked bars option and added the color category column to the category axis instead, in order to produce a similar result.

  • To show each bar segment as a percentage of the total bar:

This is an example of how you can present all stacked bars as 100% high and show the segments in each bar as a percentage of the entire bar.

  1. Create a bar chart with one numerical column on the value axis (e.g., Sales), one categorical column on the category axis (e.g., Year), and one categorical column to color by (e.g., Category).

    Response: A stacked bar chart with the sum of the numerical column (Sales) per category axis category (Year) is displayed.

  2. Right-click and select 100% Stacked Bars from the pop-up menu.

    Response: All bars are now 100% and the percentage of each segment can be shown in a tooltip by hovering with the mouse pointer over the segment.
    Comment: You can also display the segment values or percentage by adjusting the Labels settings in the Visualization Properties dialog.

  • To mark bars or bar segments:

  • Click on a bar or bar segment to mark it.

  • Comment: Press Ctrl and click to add more bars or bar segments.

  • Click and drag with the mouse to draw a rectangle over interesting items.

  • Response: All bars or bar segments touched by the rectangle will be marked.

  • Place the mouse pointer in the area of the scale labels and then click and drag with the mouse along the axis.

  • Response: A rectangle is drawn across the visualization so that you can mark all bars whose heights are between two specified axis values.

    Comment: Only those bars with the top part of the bar included within the axis-marking rectangle will be marked. This allows you to select bars with heights within a specific span. You cannot mark bar segments using axis-marking.

  • To learn more about marking, see Marking in Visualizations.

  • To add a reference line to the bar chart:

  1. Right-click on the visualization to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Properties.

  3. Go to the Lines & Curves page.

  4. Select the check box for any of the default lines or click on Add to define a new horizontal or vertical line.

    Comment: You can only add lines to the category axis when it is in continuous mode. Right-click on the scale labels and select Continuous Scale from the pop-up menu.

  • To add a curve fit to the bar chart:

  1. Right-click on the visualization to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Properties.

  3. Go to the Lines & Curves page.

  4. Click on Add and select a suitable curve fit from the drop-down menu.

    Comment: You can select from a number of predefined curve fits, or define your own curve using Curve Draw. See Curve Fit Models for more information about the different options.

  5. Once the curve has been created, you can change its settings on the Lines & Curves page. Some of the curve settings are also available from the pop-up menu in the visualization.

  • To add multiple scales:

  1. Right-click on the value axis and select Multiple Scales from the pop-up menu.

    Comment: By default, you will get one scale for each color that is defined under Color By.

  2. You can also go to the Value Axis page in the Visualization Properties dialog and click the Multiple scales radio button. This is also where you can change the settings for the different scales as well as define which side of the bar chart a certain scale should be located.

    Comment: If you are using values from different columns on the various scales, you can also use drag and drop to move columns from one side to another.

  • To add error bars to the bar chart:

  1. Right-click in the visualization to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Properties.

  3. Go to the Error Bars page.

  4. In the Visible error bars list, select the column or measure to use, and select the check box next to it.

    Response: The settings for the selected column or measure will be displayed in the lower part of the dialog.

    Comment: Only columns and measures with numerical values are listed.

  5. To define an upper error, choose a column or measure in the Upper error column selector. To define a lower error, choose a column or measure in the Lower error column selector.

    Response: The defined error bars appear in the visualization. See the Error Bars page in the Bar Chart Properties for more information about the settings. To learn more about error bars in general, see Error Bars.

    Note: Make sure the bar chart is displayed using the layout option Side-by-side bars. Error bars cannot be displayed in bar charts with percentage scaling, that is, with Stacked bars and 100% stacked bars. Open the Appearance page in the Bar Chart Properties dialog if you need to change the bar chart layout.

  6. To create a new bar chart:

  1. Click on the New Bar Chart button on the toolbar, NewBarChartButton.png.

    Comment: You can also select Insert > New Visualization > Bar Chart from the menu.

    Response: A first attempt to set up a suitable bar chart is made by the application.

  2. Adjust the bar chart to display the categories and measures of your choice.

    Comment: For more information about how to change what to show on the two axes, see Column Selectors.

See also:

Bar Chart Properties

What is a Bar Chart?

Bar Chart Properties

Bar Chart Properties

The Bar Chart Properties dialog consists of several pages:

  • General

  • Data

  • Appearance

  • Formatting

  • Fonts

  • Category Axis

  • Value Axis

  • Colors

  • Labels

  • Tooltip

  • Legend

  • Trellis

  • Lines & Curves

  • Error Bars

  • To reach the Bar Chart Properties dialog:

  1. Right-click on the bar chart visualization.

  2. Select Properties from the pop-up menu.

    Comment: You can also click on the bar chart visualization to make it active and then select Edit > Visualization Properties.

See also:

How to Use the Bar Chart

What is a Bar Chart?

Bar Chart Properties – General

BarChartProperties–General.png


Option

Description

Title

The title of the visualization.

Tip: Double-click on the title bar of the visualization for a shortcut to this field.

Show title bar

Specifies whether or not to show the visualization title.

Description

A description of the visualization. This description can optionally be shown in the legend and/or in the visualization.

Show description in visualization

Specifies whether or not to show the description in the visualization.

See also:

Bar Chart Properties

How to Use the Bar Chart

What is a Bar Chart?

Bar Chart Properties – Data

BarChartProperties–Data.png

Option

Description

Data table

Specifies the data table on which the visualization will work.

Marking

Specifies the marking (that is, the color and relationships to other marked items) that will be used to mark items in this visualization.

Limit data using markings

Lists the available markings that can be used to limit what is shown in this visualization. This means that the visualization only displays data that has been marked in other visualizations.

If more than one marking is selected, you can choose how the data in the markings should be combined.

New...

Opens the New Marking dialog where you can specify a new marking.

The color and name of a previously created marking is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Rows must be included in

Specifies how the data in the markings should be combined if you have selected to limit the data by more than one marking.

   All markings (AND)
  

Use this option if you want this visualization to show the intersection of the markings selected in Limit data using markings. This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in both markings. This visualization will then show only the data that has been marked using both of the selected markings.

   Any marking (OR)
   

Use this option if you want this visualization to show the union of the markings selected in Limit data using markings.

This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in either of the two markings. This visualization will then show data that has been marked using either of the selected markings.

Limit data using filterings

Defines how different filtering schemes in the analysis should affect this visualization.

Select Use the current filtering from the page if you want the visualization to always utilize the filtering scheme that is used on the page where the visualization is located. If you move the visualization to a new page, then the visualization will automatically start reacting on the filtering scheme that is used on the new page.

Select a specific filtering scheme from the list if you want the visualization to always use that filtering scheme. Moving the visualization to another page with a different filtering scheme will not affect this setting.

If you select to limit data using more than one filtering scheme, the intersection of the filterings will be used. This means that the visualization will show only the data that is made visible by all of the filtering schemes.

New...

Opens the New Filtering Scheme dialog where you can specify a new filtering scheme.

The color and name of a previously created filtering scheme is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Limit data using expression

You can limit what data should be available for a certain visualization using an expression. If you have defined a limiting expression, it will be displayed here.

Edit...

Opens the Limit Data Using Expression dialog where you can define a boolean expression to use for limiting the data in this visualization.

See also:

Bar Chart Properties

How to Use the Bar Chart

What is a Bar Chart?

Bar Chart Properties – Appearance

BarChartProperties–Appearance.png

Option

Description

Orientation

 

   Vertical bars

Use this option to display the bars in the visualization vertically.

   Horizontal bars

Use this option to display the bars in the visualization horizontally.

Layout

 

   Side-by-side bars

Use this option to place bars from the color category side-by-side instead of stacked on top of each other. The effect is similar to what you get if you add the color category column to the category axis together with the current category axis column.

   Stacked bars

Use this option to keep color categories stacked on top of each other.
Note: This option should not be used if you want to display error bars in the bar chart.

   100% stacked bars

Use this option to set the heights of all bars to 100%. The size of the bar segments represents how much of the percentage of the total sum for the group is constituted of the sums of the values in the category.

The exact percentage of each category can be seen in the tooltip displayed when hovering with the mouse pointer over a bar segment.
Note: This option should not be used if you want to display error bars in the bar chart.

Bar width

Drag the slider to modify the width of the bars.

Show shadows indicating the unfiltered data

Shows a gray shadow behind all visible bars, indicating the height of the bar if all filters are reset and all data is available.

Sort bars by value

Sorts all bars from the highest to the lowest bar. The bars are resorted when filtering is applied.

Time series

 

   Compensate for missing values

Select this check box if you are using a Date, Time or DateTime column somewhere in the visualization and you need to perform some calculation where a required time period is missing. For example, if you have created a visualization showing cumulative sums and there are missing data for some categories, selecting this check box will produce a bar of the same size as the previous bar instead of showing no bar at all. See Working With Time Hierarchies for more information.

Enabling this setting will temporarily add new rows with empty values for the missing periods so that they can be used in the calculation.

See also:

Bar Chart Properties

How to Use the Bar Chart

What is a Bar Chart?

Bar Chart Properties – Formatting

BarChartProperties–Formatting.png

Option

Description

Axes

Displays which column and category are currently being used on each of the two axes in the bar chart. Click on the one you want to change the settings for. If the columns on the axes are of the same type, you can set formatting for both axes at the same time.

Reset

Resets the formatting for the selected axis values according to the settings defined on column level. If no column formatting has been set, axis formatting settings defined in the Options dialog will be used. If no settings have been specified in the Options dialog, the default settings for the visualization type will be used.

Category

Lists the available formatting categories for the selected axis. Each category in this list has separate settings. Which categories are available depends on the data type of the selected axis. See Formatting Settings for a full description of all possible options.

Note: These settings affect only the current visualization. For general information about formatting, see Formatting Overview.

See also:

Bar Chart Properties

What is a Bar Chart?

How to Use the Bar Chart

Formatting Overview

Axis Formatting

Column Properties - Formatting

Bar Chart Properties – Fonts

BarChartProperties–Fonts.png

Option

Description

Settings for

Lists all items for which you can change the font settings. Click to select an item in the list to change the font settings for that text in the visualization. Press Ctrl and click on more items to change the settings for multiple items simultaneously.

Font

Specifies the font to use for the selected items.

Font style

Specifies the font style to use for the selected items.

Size

Specifies the font size to use for the selected items.

See also:

Bar Chart Properties

How to Use the Bar Chart

What is a Bar Chart?

Bar Chart Properties – Category Axis

BarChartProperties–CategoryAxis.png

Option

Description

Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy to be displayed on the category axis.

Settings...

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog, where you can change the scale mode from categorical to continuous, and vice versa, as well as changing the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

Range

 

   Min

Determines the lower value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently lowest value in the filtered data.

   Max

Determines the upper value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently highest value in the filtered data.

   Set to Current Range

Allows you to set the axis range to the currently filtered values.

 

   Include origin

Available for continuous axes only. Always includes the coordinates (0, 0) in the visualization, regardless of filtering.

   Show zoom slider

Shows a zoom slider that you can manually manipulate to view only the interesting bars in the bar chart.

Show gridlines

Specifies whether or not gridlines should be visible.

Comment: This refers to vertical gridlines in a vertical bar chart, and horizontal gridlines in a horizontal bar chart.

Scale labels

 

   Show labels

Specifies whether or not scale labels should be visible.

      Horizontally

Shows scale labels horizontally.

      Vertically

Shows scale labels vertically.

      Max number of labels

Select the check box to specify a maximum number of scale labels to be shown. Limiting the number of labels can improve readability on axis scales with many values.

Scale

 

   Log scale

Available for continuous axes only. Changes the scale from a linear scale to a logarithmic base 10 scale [log10 (x)].

   Reverse scale

Reverses the current sort order, so that the lowest value is displayed at the top of the scale.

See also:

Bar Chart Properties

How to Use the Bar Chart

What is a Bar Chart?

Bar Chart Properties – Value Axis

One value axis with a single scale

BarChartProperties–ValueAxis1.png

Option

Description

Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy to be displayed on the value axis.

Settings...

[Not available in this visualization.]

One axis with a single scale

Use this option if you want to show the values from a single column on the value axis, or if you have multiple columns that can be presented using the same scale.

Multiple scales

Use this option to show two value axes (left and right) with two or more different scales. For example, use it if you want to display two columns of very different magnitudes in the same visualization.

Range

 

   Min

Determines the lower value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently lowest value in the filtered data.

   Max

Determines the upper value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently highest value in the filtered data.

   Set to Current Range

Allows you to set the axis range to the currently filtered values.

   Include origin

Available for continuous axes only. Always includes the coordinates (0, 0) in the visualization, regardless of filtering.

   Show zoom slider

Shows a zoom slider that you can manually manipulate to view only the interesting segments of the bar chart.

Show gridlines

Specifies whether or not gridlines should be visible.

Comment: This refers to vertical gridlines in a horizontal bar chart, and horizontal gridlines in a vertical bar chart.

Scale labels

 

   Show labels

Specifies whether or not scale labels should be visible.

      Horizontally

Shows scale labels horizontally.

      Vertically

Shows scale labels vertically.

      Max number of labels

Select the check box to specify a maximum number of scale labels to be shown. Limiting the number of labels can improve readability on axis scales with many values.

Scale

 

   Reverse scale

Reverses the current sort order on the scale.

Multiple scales

BarChartProperties–ValueAxis2.png

Option

Description

Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy to be displayed on the value axis.

Settings...

[Not available in this visualization.]

One axis with a single scale

Use this option if you want to show the values from a single column on the value axis, or if you have multiple columns that can be presented using the same scale.

Multiple scales

Use this option to show two value axes (left and right) with two or more different scales. For example, use it if you want to display two columns of very different magnitudes in the same visualization.

Individual scaling

 

   For each color

Use this option to display one scale for each category used to color the markers by. For example, if you put two different columns on the value axis (for example, Oil Production and BNP), you can use the "(Column Names)" option to color by and click this radio button to display one scale for Oil Production and one for BNP.

Do not use this option if you need to color by a large number of different categories.

Note that you should apply true categorical coloring before using this option. If you use a continuous column on the color axis, you may end up with a different result than the expected. This applies even if the continuous color mode looks "categorical" at first sight.

   For each trellis panel

Use this option to display one scale for each trellis panel.

Zoom

 

   Show zoom slider

Shows a zoom slider that you can manually manipulate to view only the interesting segments of the bar chart.

   Show gridlines

Specifies whether or not gridlines should be visible.

Comment: This refers to vertical gridlines in a horizontal bar chart, and horizontal gridlines in a vertical bar chart.

Scale labels

 

   Show labels

Specifies whether or not scale labels should be visible.

      Horizontally

Shows scale labels horizontally.

Note: Only available for individual scaling for each trellis panel.

      Vertically

Shows scale labels vertically.

Note: Only available for individual scaling for each trellis panel.

      Max number of labels

Select the check box to specify a maximum number of scale labels to be shown. Limiting the number of labels can improve readability on axis scales with many values.

Individual scale settings

 

[Drop-down list]

Select the scale for which you wish to change the settings. Select All scales to change settings for all scales simultaneously.

Scale Range...

Opens the Scale Range dialog where you can specify the range of the selected scale, and also determine whether or not to include the origin (0,0).

Position

Specifies which side of the visualization the scales should be positioned. The available alternatives vary depending on whether the bars are displayed vertically or horizontally.

   Left value axis

Select this option to place the selected scale on the left-hand side of the visualization in a vertical bar chart.

   Right value axis

Select this option to place the selected scale on the right-hand side of the visualization in a vertical bar chart.

   Bottom value axis

Select this option to place the selected scale at the bottom of the visualization in a horizontal bar chart.

   Top value axis

Select this option to place the selected scale on top of the visualization in a horizontal bar chart.

Reverse scale

Reverses the current sort order on the scale.

See also:

Bar Chart Properties

How to Use the Bar Chart

What is a Bar Chart?

Bar Chart Properties – Colors

BarChartProperties–Colors.png

Option

Description

Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy to color by.

Settings

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog where you can change the scale mode for the selected column or hierarchy from continuous to categorical and vice versa, as well as changing the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

Color mode

Specifies in which color mode to set up the color scheme. Which modes are available depends on whether the scale is in categorical or continuous mode. For columns in continuous scale mode, you can select one of the following color modes: Gradient, Segments, or Fixed. For columns in categorical scale mode, you can select either Categorical or Fixed color mode. To learn more about the color modes, see Color Modes Overview.

One scale per

Specifies whether there should be one separate scale per trellis panel for trellised bar charts, or if one scale should apply to the entire visualization. Only applicable to columns in continuous scale mode.

ColorSchemeMenu.png

[Color Schemes menu]

Opens a menu where you can select an already existing color scheme and apply it to the visualization, or apply the currently open color scheme to another visualization in the analysis.

   From Visualization

Lets you select a color scheme from another visualization in the analysis. Only color schemes that are applicable to the current color scheme will be listed.

   Document Color Schemes

Lets you select a color scheme that has previously been saved within the analysis. Only color schemes that are applicable to the current color scheme will be listed. This menu option is only available if one or more document color schemes already exist.

   [Predefined color schemes]

Lists a number of predefined color schemes. Available for columns in continuous scale mode only. For a full description of the predefined color schemes, see Predefined Color Schemes.

Tip: To facilitate setting up a new color scheme, you can open a predefined color scheme with a similar appearance, and then adjust it to suit your needs.

   Open from Library...

Opens the Open from Library dialog where you can select a color scheme that has previously been saved to the library.

   Open from File...

Opens a dialog where you can select a previously saved color scheme.

   Save As

Lets you save a color scheme as a library item, a local file or a document color scheme.

Library Item – Opens the Save as Library Item dialog, where you can specify a location in the library and a file name to save the currently open color scheme for later reuse.

File – Opens a dialog where you can specify a location and a file name to save your currently open color scheme locally on your computer for later reuse.

Document Color Scheme – Opens the Save Document Color Scheme dialog, where you can specify a name and save the currently open color scheme for later reuse within the analysis.

   Apply to Visualizations...

Opens the Apply to Visualizations dialog where you can select other visualizations (within the analysis) that you want to apply the current color scheme to. Only visualizations with compatible color schemes are listed.

Note: If you apply a color scheme to a table, cross table, or heat map, the coloring will not take effect immediately. The color scheme will be added as an empty color scheme grouping, and you must select which columns or axis values to include in the grouping by opening the Edit Color Scheme Grouping dialog.

[Color scheme area]

The area in the lower part of the dialog shows the current color scheme. That is, the colors and values currently used in the visualization. You can modify color schemes in numerous ways to give the visualization the appearance you prefer. The color scheme area will look different, and have different available settings, depending on the characteristics of the column used to color the visualization by, as well as the selected color mode. To learn more about color schemes and color modes, see Color Schemes Overview and Color Modes Overview respectively.

Add Point

Available for continuous columns only. Adds a new anchor point to the color scheme.

Delete Point

Available for continuous columns only. Deletes the selected anchor point.

Add Rule...

Opens the Add Rule dialog where you can define a rule that functions as an exception to the rest of the defined color scheme. A rule has higher priority than the rest of the color scheme. For example, you can define a rule to give the top five items in your data a different color than the rest of the items. If you add many rules to a color scheme, the rules are prioritized from top to bottom. Which rule types are available depends on the characteristics of the column or hierarchy used to color the visualization by. See Details on Add/Edit Rule for full descriptions of the rule types.

Reset

Resets the color scheme to the one that was in effect when the visualization was created. Any added rules will be removed. Which color scheme should be used by default when you create a new visualization is defined in the Visualization page of the Options dialog.

Note: The color of marked items is changed under Edit > Document Properties.

See also:

Bar Chart Properties

How to Use the Bar Chart

What is a Bar Chart?

Bar Chart Properties – Labels

BarChartProperties–Labels.png

Option

Description

Show labels for

Determines whether to show labels on all bars (All), bars containing marked rows only (Marked rows), or not to show any labels at all (None).

Types of labels

Determines whether to show labels on the Complete bar and/or on Bar segments only. For bar segments you can also specify whether you want the value of the bar segment or the bar segments' percentage of the total value to be shown.

Note that bar segment labels are only drawn if they fit within the bar segment. If no labels are shown, try increasing the bar width, using a smaller font for the label, or removing some bar percentage decimals.

Label orientation

Determines whether to display the labels horizontally or vertically.

Max number of labels on complete bars

Specifies the maximum number of labels to be shown. If the number is smaller than the available number of bars, the labels will be equally distributed along the category axis.

Bar percentage decimals

Specifies the number of decimals to show when 100% bars are used.

Note: Bar percentage is only visible when you have selected the option All bars should have maximum height on the Appearance page, and it gives relevant information only when the bars are colored by a column or hierarchy. The number specified here will also affect the number of decimals shown for bar segments in the tooltip.

See also:

Bar Chart Properties

How to Use the Bar Chart

What is a Bar Chart?

Bar Chart Properties – Tooltip

BarChartProperties–Tooltip.png

Option

Description

Display the following values

Specifies what will be shown in the tooltip.

Add...

Opens the Add Tooltip Value dialog, where you can add the content from another column, hierarchy, or any custom expression to be shown in the tooltip. You can also use images in tooltips. See Highlighting in Visualizations for more information.

Edit...

Opens the Edit Tooltip Value dialog, where you can change the information to be shown in the tooltip.

Delete

Deletes the selected value from the list.

Move Up

Moves the selected value up in the list and, hence, up in the tooltip.

Move Down

Moves the selected value down in the list and, hence, down in the tooltip.

Tooltip format

 

   Value names and values

Shows the tooltip content in a format where the selected column name, hierarchy or custom expression is displayed. For example, Year: 2003, Type: Cucumber, etc.

   Visualization properties and values

Shows the tooltip content in a format where the visualization property for each value is displayed. For example, Category axis: 2003, Color: Cucumber, etc.

See also:

Bar Chart Properties

How to Use the Bar Chart

What is a Bar Chart?

Bar Chart Properties – Legend

BarChartProperties–Legend.png

Option

Description

Show legend

Specifies whether or not the docked legend should be shown in the visualization.

Position

Specifies which side of the visualization the legend should be positioned: the right-hand side or the left-hand side.

Display the following legend items

Specifies what will be shown in the legend.

By clearing a check box you will completely hide that item from the legend. You can also select to show or hide parts of the legend information using the check boxes under Settings for the selected item in the list, see below.

Settings

Defines how the selected legend item should be displayed. The available options vary between legend items.

   Show title

Use this option to show or hide the title for the selected item. The title is typically what is displayed above an axis selector or similar:

CrossTableProperties–LegendInsert1.png

   Show axis selector

Select this option to show or hide the axis selector for the selected item.

CrossTableProperties–LegendInsert1.png

See also:

Bar Chart Properties

How to Use the Bar Chart

What is a Bar Chart?

Bar Chart Properties – Trellis

BarChartProperties–Trellis.png

Option

Description

Rows and columns

Splits the visualization into different panels for all categories in the selected column or hierarchy. The number of values in the specified column or hierarchy controls the number of panels to be displayed in each row, column or page, respectively.

   Rows

A row with trellis panels will be created for each value in the selected column or hierarchy.

   Columns

A column with trellis panels will be created for each value in the selected column or hierarchy.

   Pages

A new page with trellis panels will be created for each value in the selected column or hierarchy. Scroll down in the visualization to see the next page.

Panels

Splits the visualization into different panels for all categories in the selected column or hierarchy, without binding any dimensions to either rows or columns. This means that the number of actual values in the column to split by does not control the number of shown rows or columns in any way.

The number of panels that should be visible on each page is instead specified using the Max number of rows and Max number of columns controls below.

   Split by

Specifies the column or hierarchy to define the categories by which the visualization should be split.

   Manual layout

Select the check box to manually specify the number of rows and columns that should be visible without scrolling. If the check box is cleared, the application will automatically specify the number of rows and columns.

   Max number of rows

Specifies the maximum number of panels that should be visible on each page.

   Max number of columns

Specifies the maximum number of panels that should be visible on each page.

Settings...

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog, where you can change the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

See also:

Bar Chart Properties

How to Use the Bar Chart

What is a Bar Chart?

Bar Chart Properties – Lines & Curves

BarChartProperties–Lines&Curves.png

First part of the dialog

Option

Description

Visible lines and curves

Lists the currently added lines and curves. If a checkmark is shown in the check box, then that reference line is shown in the visualization. Clear the check box to hide a line or curve.

New lines and curves can be added to this list by clicking on the Add button; see below.

Add

Displays a menu where you can select which type of line or curve to add to the list of available lines and curves, and in some cases, opens a dialog where you can specify settings to use for that line or curve.

For more information about the different curve types, see Curve Fit Models.

Edit...

Opens a dialog where you can change the settings for the selected line or curve (when applicable).

Remove

Removes the selected line or curve from the list of available lines and curves.

More

 

   Duplicate

Duplicates the currently selected line or curve. This can be particularly useful if you want to add one static curve that is calculated on the whole data set (select the Update curve manually check box) and another one that is changed upon filtering (default).

   Export Curve Fit Result...

Opens a dialog where you can choose to export the curve fit result for the selected curve to a text file or to Microsoft® Excel®. The text file can be either a regular tab separated text file, or a Spotfire Text Data Format file, which contains a bit more information about the columns (types, etc.). The Excel file can be either an XLS file or an XLSX file.

Settings

Option

Description

Appearance

Determines the color, style and width of lines and curves, as well as the color, style and size of points.

Place in

Select whether to place the line, curve or point in the Foreground or Background of the visualization.

Transparency

Determines the transparency of the selected line, curve or point. That is, the degree to which the markers can be seen through it. The transparency is strongly connected to the color.

Label and Tooltip

Opens a dialog where you can determine what information to show in the label and/or tooltip for the selected line, curve or point.

Included in axis range

Sets the automatic zooming so that the line, curve or point is always shown, even if it lies far from the currently filtered values.

Update manually

Select the check box to "freeze" the line or curve so that it is not automatically recalculated upon filtering. You can update the line or curve by clicking the Update button below or by right-clicking in the visualization and selecting Update Lines and Curves and clicking on the one you want to update.

Note: Not applicable for points.

Update

When a line or curve has been specified to be manually updated, use this button to perform the update.

One per

Determines whether to show one line or curve per Color and/or Trellis panel.

Note: Not applicable for points.

Note that you should apply true categorical coloring before using the color option. If you use a continuous column on the color axis, you may end up with a different result than the expected. This applies even if the continuous color mode looks "categorical" at first sight.

Note: Whenever there is a reference to X or Y in lines or curves for a bar chart, X always refers to the category axis while Y refers to the value axis.

See also:

Details on Reference Line

Bar Chart Properties

How to Use the Bar Chart

What is a Bar Chart?

Lines and Curves

Bar Chart Properties – Error Bars

BarChartProperties–ErrorBars.png

Option

Description

Visible error bars

Lists the numerical columns and measures that you can define error bars for in the visualization. If a check mark is shown in the check box, then error bars for that column or measure are visible in the visualization. Clear the check box to hide the error bars for a column or measure. No error bars will be visible in the visualization until an upper or lower error has been defined.

Settings

Shows the settings for the selected column or measure.

   Upper error

Specifies the column and aggregation method, or custom expression to use for the upper error bars.

Note: The chosen column or measure must have numerical values.

   Lower error

Specifies the column and aggregation method, or custom expression to use for the lower error bars.

Note: The chosen column or measure must have numerical values.

   Color

 

      Same as bar

Choose this option if you want an error bar to have the same color as the bar. For positive bars, the lower error bar will be invisible if this option is selected, and for negative bars, the upper error bar will be invisible.

      Custom

Choose this option if you want to use a custom color for the error bars. Click on the drop-down list to show the palette and select a different color.

   Show end caps

Specifies whether or not orthogonal lines should be displayed at the end of the error bars.

   Include error bars in axis range

Sets the automatic zooming so that the error bars are always visible.

Note: The upper and lower errors refer to the underlying data. This means that if you use reversed scales in a visualization, the error bars will also be reversed. For example, for a vertical bar chart with reversed value axis, the upper error bar will be displayed below the bar. It also means that when the bars are displayed horizontally, an upper error will be displayed to the right of the bar.

Note: Make sure the layout of the bar chart is set to Side-by-side bars. Open the Appearance page if you need to change the bar chart layout.

See also:

Bar Chart Properties

How to Use the Bar Chart

What is a Bar Chart?

Error Bars

Line Chart

What is a Line Chart?


Line charts are ideal for showing trends over time. A standard example would be how the stock value for a certain company develops over time on the stock market. However, it does not necessarily need to be time along the X-axis. Any data that behaves like a function with respect to the variable on the X-axis can be plotted. Line charts emphasize time flow and rate of change rather than the amount of change.

You can select parts of a line by clicking and dragging with the mouse. If one node in the line is included when you drag, that node will be marked. If two or more adjacent nodes are included, the line between the nodes will also be marked, but if there are nodes in between which are not included, only the separate nodes will be marked. You can select several nodes in different parts of the line by pressing Ctrl and click and drag with the mouse. By pressing Alt, the entire line is marked if you click and drag, just as it is if you simply click once anywhere on the line.

Example:

Below is a line chart showing the sum of sales for two different product categories over several years. The line chart has one color (one line) per product category.

WhatisaLineChart1.png

When several different years are available it may also be useful to trellis the data by year to display the variation during the years separately:

WhatisaLineChart2.png

Multiple scales can also be used on the Y-axis, when you want to compare several lines with significantly different value ranges.

Step lines

The line chart can also be used as a step chart, where the lines are drawn in incremental steps rather than as straight lines between each value.

Step charts are especially useful when changes occur at certain times but the values remain more or less stable between changes.

WhatisaLineChart3.png

Changing into step mode is done by selecting the Draw as step lines check box on the Appearance page of the Line Chart Properties dialog.

All visualizations can be set up to show data limited by one or more markings in other visualizations only (details visualizations). Line charts can also be limited by one or more filterings. Another alternative is to set up a line chart without any filtering at all. See Limiting What is Shown in Visualizations for more information.

See also:

How to Use the Line Chart

Line Chart Properties

How to Use the Line Chart


  • To apply coloring (split in categories):

  1. In the filters panel, click and hold down the left mouse button on the filter representing the column that you want to color by.

    Comment: Coloring is also available in the Visualization Properties dialog. The color of marked items is changed under Edit > Document Properties.

  2. Drag the filter to the center of the visualization.

    Response: Drop targets appear in the middle of the visualization.

  3. Release the mouse button on the Color target.

    Response: The lines are colored with one color for each category in the selected column. If the lines have not been previously split by adding a Line By column, the lines will be split according to the color categories.

    Comment: To learn more about coloring in Spotfire, see Coloring Overview.

  • To mark parts of the line:

  1. Click and drag with the mouse around the part of the line you want to mark.

    Response: If one node in the line is included when you drag, that node will be marked. If two or more adjacent nodes are included, the line between the nodes will also be marked, but if there are nodes in between which are not included, only the separate nodes will be marked.

    Comment: You can select several nodes in different parts of the line by pressing Ctrl and click and drag with the mouse.

  • To mark the entire line:

  1. Click once anywhere on the line.
    OR

  2. Press Shift and click and drag with the mouse over the line.

  • To use multiple columns on one axis:

This is an example of how to use two columns on the Y-axis. Each column will be represented by a colored line.

  1. Click on the arrow next to the plus sign on the axis of your choice.

  2. Select a new column from the menu.
    Comment: A column can also be dragged and dropped from the filters panel.

  3. Select (Column Names) in the Color By drop down list.
    Response: The lines are colored with one color for each column.
    Comment: For more information on (Column Names), see the Non-Column Selections page.

  • To split lines without coloring:

  1. In the filters panel, click and hold down the left mouse button on the filter representing the column that you want to split by.

    Comment: The Line By setting is also available in the Properties dialog.

  2. Drag the filter to the center of the visualization.

    Response: Drop targets appear in the middle of the visualization.

  3. Release the mouse button on the Line By target.

    Response: The lines are split into one line for each category in the selected column, unless coloring has already split the lines in a more granular way.
    Comment: It is also possible to combine a Line By action with a Color By, so that the lines are split by one category and colored by another.

  • To add a reference line to the line chart:

  1. Right-click on the visualization to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Properties.

  3. Go to the Lines & Curves page.

  4. Select the check box for any of the default lines or click on Add to define a new horizontal or vertical line.

    Comment: You can only add lines to the X-axis when it is in continuous mode. Right-click on the scale labels and select Continuous Scale from the pop-up menu.

  • To add multiple scales:

  1. Right-click on the Y-axis and select Multiple Scales from the pop-up menu.

    Comment: By default, you will get one scale for each color that is defined under Color By.

  2. You can also go to the Y-axis page in the Visualization Properties dialog and click the Multiple scales radio button. This is also where you change the settings for the different scales and determine whether a certain scale should be located on the left or the right Y-axis.

    Comment: If you are using values from different columns on the various scales, you can also use drag and drop to move columns from one side to another.

  • To add a curve fit to the line chart:

  1. Right-click on the visualization to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Properties.

  3. Go to the Lines & Curves page.

  4. Click on Add and select a suitable curve fit from the drop-down menu..

    Comment: You can select from a number of predefined curve fits, or define your own curve using Curve Draw. See Curve Fit Models for more information about the different options.

  5. Once the curve has been created, you can change its settings on the Lines & Curves page. Some of the curve settings are also available from the pop-up menu in the visualization.

  • To add error bars to the line chart:

  1. Right-click in the visualization to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Properties.

  3. Go to the Error Bars page.

  4. In the Visible error bars list, select the column or measure to use, and select the check box next to it.

    Response: The settings for the selected column or measure will be displayed in the lower part of the dialog.

    Comment: Only columns and measures with numerical values are listed.

  5. To define an upper error, choose a column or measure in the Upper error column selector. To define a lower error, choose a column or measure in the Lower error column selector.

    Response: The defined error bars appear in the visualization.

    Comment: Error bars can only be used on numerical values.

    Note: Error bars cannot be added to line charts with percentage scaling. Therefore, line charts using individual scaling for each line cannot be combined with error bars.

  • To create a new line chart:

  1. Click on the New Line Chart button on the toolbar, NewLineChartButton.png.

    Comment: You can also select Insert > New Visualization > Line Chart from the menu.

    Response: A first attempt to set up a suitable line chart is made by the application.

  2. Adjust the line chart to display the categories and measures of your choice.

    Comment: For more information about how to change what to show on the two axes, see Column Selectors.

See also:

What is a Line Chart?

Line Chart Properties

Line Chart Properties

Line Chart Properties

The Line Chart Properties dialog consists of several pages:

  • General

  • Data

  • Appearance

  • Formatting

  • Fonts

  • X-axis

  • Y-axis

  • Line By

  • Colors

  • Labels

  • Tooltip

  • Legend

  • Trellis

  • Lines & Curves

  • Error Bars

  • To reach the Line Chart Properties dialog:

  1. Right-click on the line chart visualization.

  2. Select Properties from the pop-up menu.

    Comment: You can also click on the line chart visualization to make it active and then select Edit > Visualization Properties.

See also:

What is a Line Chart?

How to Use the Line Chart

Line Chart Properties – General

LineChartProperties–General.png


Option

Description

Title

The title of the visualization.

Tip: Double-click on the title bar of the visualization for a shortcut to this field.

Show title bar

Specifies whether or not to show the visualization title.

Description

A description of the visualization. This description can optionally be shown in the legend and/or in the visualization.

Show description in visualization

Specifies whether or not to show the description in the visualization.

See also:

Line Chart Properties

What is a Line Chart?

How to Use the Line Chart

Line Chart Properties – Data

LineChartProperties–Data.png

Option

Description

Data table

Specifies the data table on which the visualization will work.

Marking

Specifies the marking (that is, the color and relationships to other marked items) that will be used to mark items in this visualization.

Limit data using markings

Lists the available markings that can be used to limit what is shown in this visualization. This means that the visualization only displays data that has been marked in other visualizations.

If more than one marking is selected, you can choose how the data in the markings should be combined.

New...

Opens the New Marking dialog where you can specify a new marking.

The color and name of a previously created marking is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Rows must be included in

Specifies how the data in the markings should be combined if you have selected to limit the data by more than one marking.

   All markings (AND)
  

Use this option if you want this visualization to show the intersection of the markings selected in Limit data using markings. This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in both markings. This visualization will then show only the data that has been marked using both of the selected markings.

   Any marking (OR)
   

Use this option if you want this visualization to show the union of the markings selected in Limit data using markings.

This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in either of the two markings. This visualization will then show data that has been marked using either of the selected markings.

Limit data using filterings

Defines how different filtering schemes in the analysis should affect this visualization.

Select Use the current filtering from the page if you want the visualization to always utilize the filtering scheme that is used on the page where the visualization is located. If you move the visualization to a new page, then the visualization will automatically start reacting on the filtering scheme that is used on the new page.

Select a specific filtering scheme from the list if you want the visualization to always use that filtering scheme. Moving the visualization to another page with a different filtering scheme will not affect this setting.

If you select to limit data using more than one filtering scheme, the intersection of the filterings will be used. This means that the visualization will show only the data that is made visible by all of the filtering schemes.

New...

Opens the New Filtering Scheme dialog where you can specify a new filtering scheme.

The color and name of a previously created filtering scheme is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Limit data using expression

You can limit what data should be available for a certain visualization using an expression. If you have defined a limiting expression, it will be displayed here.

Edit...

Opens the Limit Data Using Expression dialog where you can define a boolean expression to use for limiting the data in this visualization.

See also:

Line Chart Properties

What is a Line Chart?

How to Use the Line Chart

Line Chart Properties – Appearance

LineChartProperties–Appearance.png


Option

Description

Line width

Specifies the width of the lines in the line chart.

Show markers

Determines whether or not markers should be displayed for the axis values.

   Marker size

Use the slider to increase or decrease the size of the markers.

Draw as step lines

Select this check box if you want the lines to be drawn in incremental steps rather than as straight lines directly between each value.

Break lines on empty values

Determines whether lines should be broken or remain connected when an empty value is found in the data used to create the line.

Time series

 

   Compensate for missing values

Select this check box if you are using a Date, Time or DateTime column somewhere in the visualization and you need to perform some calculation where a required time period is missing. For example, if you have created a visualization showing cumulative sums and there are missing data for some categories, selecting this check box will produce a value of the same size as the previous value instead of interpolating between the values. See Working With Time Hierarchies for more information.

Enabling this setting will temporarily add new rows with empty values for the missing periods so that they can be used in the calculation.

See also:

Line Chart Properties

What is a Line Chart?

How to Use the Line Chart

Line Chart Properties – Formatting

LineChartProperties–Formatting.png

Option

Description

Axes

Displays which column and category are currently being used on each of the two axes in the line chart. Click on the one you want to change the settings for. If the columns on the axes are of the same type, you can set formatting for both axes at the same time. If you use multiple scales in the visualization, each of the different scales on the Y-axis will appear in the list, and you can apply formatting to them individually.

Reset

Resets the formatting for the selected axis values according to the settings defined on column level. If no column formatting has been set, axis formatting settings defined in the Options dialog will be used. If no settings have been specified in the Options dialog, the default settings for the visualization type will be used.

Category

Lists the available formatting categories for the selected axis. Each category in this list has separate settings. Which categories are available depends on the data type of the selected axis. See Formatting Settings for a full description of all possible options.

Note: These settings affect only the current visualization. For general information about formatting, see Formatting Overview.

See also:

Line Chart Properties

What is a Line Chart?

How to Use the Line Chart

Formatting Overview

Axis Formatting

Column Properties - Formatting

Line Chart Properties – Fonts

LineChartProperties–Fonts.png

Option

Description

Settings for

Lists all items for which you can change the font settings. Click to select an item in the list to change the font settings for that text in the visualization. Press Ctrl and click on more items to change the settings for multiple items simultaneously.

Font

Specifies the font to use for the selected items.

Font style

Specifies the font style to use for the selected items.

Size

Specifies the font size to use for the selected items.

See also:

Line Chart Properties

What is a Line Chart?

How to Use the Line Chart

Line Chart Properties – X-axis

LineChartProperties–X-axis.png

Option

Description

Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy to be displayed on the X-axis.

Settings...

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog, where you can change the scale mode from categorical to continuous, and vice versa, as well as changing the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

Range

 

   Min

Determines the lower value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently lowest value in the filtered data.

   Max

Determines the upper value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently highest value in the filtered data.

   Set to Current Range

Allows you to set the axis range to the currently filtered values.

 

   Include origin

Available for continuous axes only. Always includes the coordinates (0, 0) in the visualization, regardless of filtering.

   Show zoom slider

Shows a zoom slider that you can manually manipulate to view only the interesting parts of the line chart.

   Show gridlines

Specifies whether or not vertical gridlines should be visible.

Scale labels

 

   Show labels

Specifies whether or not scale labels should be visible.

      Horizontally

Shows scale labels horizontally.

      Vertically

Shows scale labels vertically.

      Max number of labels

Select the check box to specify a maximum number of scale labels to be shown. Limiting the number of labels can improve readability on axis scales with many values.

Scale

 

   Log scale

Available for continuous axes only. Changes the scale from a linear scale to a logarithmic base 10 scale [log10 (x)].

   Reverse scale

Reverses the current sort order, so that the lowest value is displayed at the top of the scale.

See also:

Line Chart Properties

What is a Line Chart?

How to Use the Line Chart

Line Chart Properties – Y-axis

One Y-axis with a single scale

LineChartProperties–Y-axis.png

Option

Description

Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy to be displayed on the Y-axis.

Settings...

[Not available in this visualization.]

One axis with a single scale

Use this option if you want to show the values from a single column on the Y-axis, or if you have multiple columns that can be presented using the same scale.

Multiple scales

Use this option to show two Y-axes (left and right) with two or more different scales. For example, use it if you want to display two columns of very different magnitudes in the same visualization.

Range

 

   Min

Determines the lower value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently lowest value in the filtered data.

   Max

Determines the upper value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently highest value in the filtered data.

   Set to Current Range

Allows you to set the axis range to the currently filtered values.

   Include origin

Available for continuous columns only. Always includes the coordinates (0, 0) in the visualization, regardless of filtering.

   Show zoom slider

Shows a zoom slider that you can manually manipulate to view only the interesting segments of the line chart.

Show gridlines

Specifies whether or not horizontal gridlines should be visible.

Scale labels

 

   Show labels

Specifies whether or not scale labels should be visible.

      Horizontally

Shows scale labels horizontally.

      Vertically

Shows scale labels vertically.

      Max number of labels

Select the check box to specify a maximum number of scale labels to be shown. Limiting the number of labels can improve readability on axis scales with many values.

Scale

 

   Log scale

Changes the scale from a linear scale to a logarithmic base 10 scale [log10 (x)].

   Reverse scale

Reverses the current sort order, so that the lowest value is displayed at the top of the scale.

Multiple scales

LineChartProperties–Y-axis1.png

Option

Description

Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy to be displayed on the Y-axis.

Settings...

[Not available in this visualization.]

One axis with a single scale

Use this option if you want to show the values from a single column on the Y-axis, or if you have multiple columns that can be presented using the same scale.

Multiple scales

Use this option to show two Y-axes (left and right) with two or more different scales. For example, use it if you want to display two columns with values of very different magnitudes in the same visualization.

Individual scaling

 

   For each color

Use this option to display one scale for each category used to color the markers by. For example, if you put two different columns on the Y-axis (like Oil Production and BNP), you can use the "(Column Names)" option to color by and click this radio button to display one scale for Oil Production and one for BNP.

Do not use this option if you need to color by a large number of different categories.

Note that you should apply true categorical coloring before using this option. If you use a continuous column on the color axis, you may end up with a different result than the expected. This applies even if the continuous color mode looks "categorical" at first sight.

   For each trellis panel

Use this option to display one scale for each trellis panel.

   For each line

Use this option to display individual scales for each line defined by the "Line by" and/or the "Color by" settings.

The lines will be normalized so that all lines are shown on a scale with the maximum value for each line set to 100% and the minimum value for each line set to 0%.

Zoom

 

   Show zoom slider

Shows a zoom slider that you can manually manipulate to view only the interesting segments of the line chart.

   Show gridlines

Specifies whether or not horizontal gridlines should be visible.

Scale labels

 

   Show labels

Specifies whether or not scale labels should be visible. The scale labels are always displayed horizontally when multiple scales are shown.

   Horizontally

Shows scale labels horizontally.

Note: Only available for individual scaling for each trellis panel.

   Vertically

Shows scale labels vertically.

Note: Only available for individual scaling for each trellis panel.

      Max number of labels

Select the check box to specify a maximum number of scale labels to be shown. Limiting the number of labels can improve readability on axis scales with many values.

Individual scale settings

 

[Drop-down list]

Select the scale for which you wish to change the settings. Select All scales to change settings for all scales simultaneously.

Scale Range...

Opens the Scale Range dialog where you can specify the range of the selected scale, and also determine whether or not to include the origin (0,0).

Position

Specifies which side of the visualization the scales should be positioned.

   Left Y-axis

Select this option to place the selected scale on the left-hand side of the visualization.

   Right Y-axis

Select this option to place the selected scale on the right-hand side of the visualization.

Log scale

Changes the scale from a linear scale to a logarithmic base 10 scale [log10 (x)].

Reverse scale

Reverses the current sort order, so that the lowest value is displayed at the top of the scale.

See also:

Line Chart Properties

What is a Line Chart?

How to Use the Line Chart

Line Chart Properties – Line By

LineChartProperties–Line By.png

Option

Description

Show one line for each

Specifies the column or hierarchy by which the lines should be split.

Note: If the lines are being colored by a column or hierarchy with more categories than the one selected here, there will be no visible effect from this operation, since the coloring has already split the lines more granularly.

Currently also split by the following properties

Displays information about what other properties currently contribute to a splitting of the lines.

See also:

Line Chart Properties

What is a Line Chart?

How to Use the Line Chart

Line Chart Properties – Colors

LineChartProperties–Colors.png

Option

Description

Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy to color by.

Settings

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog where you can change the scale mode for the selected column or hierarchy from continuous to categorical and vice versa, as well as changing the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

Color mode

Specifies in which color mode to set up the color scheme. Which modes are available depends on whether the scale is in categorical or continuous mode. For columns in continuous scale mode, you can select one of the following color modes: Gradient, Segments, or Fixed. For columns in categorical scale mode, you can select either Categorical or Fixed color mode. To learn more about the color modes, see Color Modes Overview.

One scale per

Specifies whether there should be one separate scale per trellis panel for trellised line charts, or if one scale should apply to the entire visualization. Only applicable to columns in continuous scale mode.

ColorSchemeMenu.png

[Color Schemes menu]

Opens a menu where you can select an already existing color scheme and apply it to the visualization, or apply the currently open color scheme to another visualization in the analysis.

   From Visualization

Lets you select a color scheme from another visualization in the analysis. Only color schemes that are applicable to the current color scheme will be listed.

   Document Color Schemes

Lets you select a color scheme that has previously been saved within the analysis. Only color schemes that are applicable to the current color scheme will be listed. This menu option is only available if one or more document color schemes already exist.

   [Predefined color schemes]

Lists a number of predefined color schemes. Available for columns in continuous scale mode only. For a full description of the predefined color schemes, see Predefined Color Schemes.

Tip: To facilitate setting up a new color scheme, you can open a predefined color scheme with a similar appearance, and then adjust it to suit your needs.

   Open from Library...

Opens the Open from Library dialog where you can select a color scheme that has previously been saved to the library.

   Open from File...

Opens a dialog where you can select a previously saved color scheme.

   Save As

Lets you save a color scheme as a library item, a local file or a document color scheme.

Library Item – Opens the Save as Library Item dialog, where you can specify a location in the library and a file name to save the currently open color scheme for later reuse.

File – Opens a dialog where you can specify a location and a file name to save your currently open color scheme locally on your computer for later reuse.

Document Color Scheme – Opens the Save Document Color Scheme dialog, where you can specify a name and save the currently open color scheme for later reuse within the analysis.

   Apply to Visualizations...

Opens the Apply to Visualizations dialog where you can select other visualizations (within the analysis) that you want to apply the current color scheme to. Only visualizations with compatible color schemes are listed.

Note: If you apply a color scheme to a table, cross table, or heat map, the coloring will not take effect immediately. The color scheme will be added as an empty color scheme grouping, and you must select which columns or axis values to include in the grouping by opening the Edit Color Scheme Grouping dialog.

[Color scheme area]

The area in the lower part of the dialog shows the current color scheme. That is, the colors and values currently used in the visualization. You can modify color schemes in numerous ways to give the visualization the appearance you prefer. The color scheme area will look different, and have different available settings, depending on the characteristics of the column used to color the visualization by, as well as the selected color mode. To learn more about color schemes and color modes, see Color Schemes Overview and Color Modes Overview respectively.

Add Point

Available for continuous columns only. Adds a new anchor point to the color scheme.

Delete Point

Available for continuous columns only. Deletes the selected anchor point.

Add Rule...

Opens the Add Rule dialog where you can define a rule that functions as an exception to the rest of the defined color scheme. A rule has higher priority than the rest of the color scheme. For example, you can define a rule to give the top five items in your data a different color than the rest of the items. If you add many rules to a color scheme, the rules are prioritized from top to bottom. Which rule types are available depends on the characteristics of the column or hierarchy used to color the visualization by. See Details on Add/Edit Rule for full descriptions of the rule types.

Reset

Resets the color scheme to the one that was in effect when the visualization was created. Any added rules will be removed. Which color scheme should be used by default when you create a new visualization is defined in the Visualization page of the Options dialog.

Note: The color of marked items is changed under Edit > Document Properties.

See also:

Line Chart Properties

What is a Line Chart?

How to Use the Line Chart

Line Chart Properties – Labels

LineChartProperties–Labels.png

Option

Description

Show in labels

 

   Line identifier

Displays labels showing the categories used to create each line (by coloring or line by).

   Individual values

Displays labels showing the values for all points used to create the line.

Show labels for

Determines whether to show labels with on all lines (All), lines containing marked rows only (Marked rows), or not to show any labels at all (None).

Max number of labels

Specifies the maximum number of labels to be shown.

See also:

Line Chart Properties

What is a Line Chart?

How to Use the Line Chart

Line Chart Properties – Tooltip

LineChartProperties–Tooltip.png

Option

Description

Display the following values

Specifies what will be shown in the tooltip.

Add...

Opens the Add Tooltip Value dialog, where you can add the content from another column, hierarchy, or any custom expression to be shown in the tooltip. You can also use images in tooltips. See Highlighting in Visualizations for more information.

Edit...

Opens the Edit Tooltip Value dialog, where you can change the information to be shown in the tooltip.

Delete

Deletes the selected value from the list.

Move Up

Moves the selected value up in the list and, hence, up in the tooltip.

Move Down

Moves the selected value down in the list and, hence, down in the tooltip.

Tooltip format

 

   Value names and values

Shows the tooltip content in a format  where the selected column name, hierarchy or custom expression is displayed. For example, Year: 2003, Type: Cucumber, etc.

   Visualization properties and values

Shows the tooltip content in a format where the visualization property for each value is displayed. For example, X: 2003, Color: Cucumber, etc.

See also:

Line Chart Properties

What is a Line Chart?

How to Use the Line Chart

Line Chart Properties – Legend

LineChartProperties–Legend.png

Option

Description

Show legend

Specifies whether or not the docked legend should be shown in the visualization.

Position

Specifies which side of the visualization the legend should be positioned: the right-hand side or the left-hand side.

Display the following legend items

Specifies what will be shown in the legend.

By clearing a check box you will completely hide that item from the legend. You can also select to show or hide parts of the legend information using the check boxes under Settings for the selected item in the list, see below.

Settings

Defines how the selected legend item should be displayed. The available options vary between legend items.

   Show title

Use this option to show or hide the title for the selected item. The title is typically what is displayed above an axis selector or similar:

CrossTableProperties–LegendInsert1.png

   Show axis selector

Select this option to show or hide the axis selector for the selected item.

CrossTableProperties–LegendInsert1.png

See also:

Line Chart Properties

What is a Line Chart?

How to Use the Line Chart

Line Chart Properties – Trellis

LineChartProperties–Trellis.png

Option

Description

Rows and columns

Splits the visualization into different panels for all categories in the selected column or hierarchy. The number of values in the specified column or hierarchy controls the number of panels to be displayed in each row, column, or page, respectively.

   Rows

A row with trellis panels will be created for each value in the selected column or hierarchy.

   Columns

A column with trellis panels will be created for each value in the selected column or hierarchy.

   Pages

A new page with trellis panels will be created for each value in the selected column or hierarchy. Scroll down in the visualization to see the next page.

Panels

Splits the visualization into different panels for all categories in the selected column or hierarchy, without binding any dimensions to either rows or columns. This means that the number of actual values in the column to split by does not control the number of shown rows or columns in any way.

The number of panels that should be visible on each page is instead specified using the Max number of rows and Max number of columns controls below.

   Split by

Specifies the column or hierarchy to define the categories by which the visualization should be split.

   Manual layout

Select the check box to manually specify the number of rows and columns that should be visible without scrolling. If the check box is cleared, the application will automatically specify the number of rows and columns.

   Max number of rows

Specifies the maximum number of panels that should be visible on each page.

   Max number of columns

Specifies the maximum number of panels that should be visible on each page.

Settings...

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog where you can change the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

See also:

Line Chart Properties

What is a Line Chart?

How to Use the Line Chart

Line Chart Properties – Lines & Curves

LineChartProperties–Lines&Curves.png

First part of the dialog

Option

Description

Visible lines and curves

Lists the currently added lines and curves. If a checkmark is shown in the check box, then the reference line is shown in the visualization. Clear the check box to hide a line or curve.

New lines and curves can be added to this list by clicking on the Add button; see below.

Add

Displays a menu where you can select which type of line or curve to add to the list of available lines and curves, and in some cases, opens a dialog where you can specify settings to use for that line or curve.

For more information about the different curve types, see Curve Fit Models.

Edit...

Opens a dialog where you can change the settings for the selected line or curve (when applicable).

Remove

Removes the selected line or curve from the list of available lines and curves.

More

 

   Duplicate

Duplicates the currently selected line or curve. This can be particularly useful if you want to add one static curve that is calculated on the whole data set (select the Update curve manually check box) and another one that is changed upon filtering (default).

   Export Curve Fit Result...

Opens a dialog where you can choose to export the curve fit result for the selected curve to a text file or to Microsoft® Excel®. The text file can be either a regular tab separated text file, or a Spotfire Text Data Format file, which contains a bit more information about the columns (types, etc.). The Excel file can be either an XLS file or an XLSX file.

Settings

Option

Description

Appearance

Determines the color, style and width of lines and curves, and the color, style and size of points.

Place in

Select whether to place the line, curve or point in the Foreground or Background of the visualization.

Transparency

Determines the transparency of the selected line, curve or point. That is, the degree to which the markers can be seen through it. The transparency is strongly connected to the color.

Label and Tooltip

Opens a dialog where you can determine what information to show in the label and/or tooltip for the selected line, curve or point.

Included in axis range

Sets the automatic zooming so that the line, curve or point is always shown, even if it lies far from the currently filtered values.

Update manually

Select the check box to "freeze" the line or curve so that it is not automatically recalculated upon filtering. You can update the line or curve by clicking the Update button below or by right-clicking in the visualization and selecting Update Lines and Curves and clicking on the one you want to update.

Note: Not applicable for points.

Update

When a line or curve has been specified to be manually updated, use this button to perform the update.

One per

Determines whether to show one line or curve per Color, Trellis panel and/or line.

Note: Not applicable for points.

Note that you should apply true categorical coloring before using the color option. If you use a continuous column on the color axis, you may end up with a different result than the expected. This applies even if the continuous color mode looks "categorical" at first sight.

See also:

Details on Reference Line

Line Chart Properties

What is a Line Chart?

How to Use the Line Chart

Lines and Curves

Line Chart Properties – Error Bars

LineChartProperties–ErrorBars.png

Option

Description

Visible error bars

Lists the numerical columns and measures that you can define error bars for in the visualization. If a check mark is shown in the check box, then error bars for that column or measure are visible in the visualization. Clear the check box to hide the error bars for a column or measure.

Note: No error bars will be visible in the visualization until an upper or lower error has been defined.

Settings

Shows the settings for the selected column or measure.

Note: If you use multiple Y-axes in the line chart you can define different error bars for the axes. However, all the defined vertical error bars will share the same settings for Color, Show end caps, and Include error bars in axis range. For example, you cannot set one vertical error bar to be blue, and another vertical error bar to be yellow in the same line chart. This also applies to using multiple measures on a Y-axis with a single scale.

   Upper error

Specifies the column and aggregation method, or custom expression to use for the upper error bars.

Note: The chosen column or measure must have numerical values.

   Lower error

Specifies the column and aggregation method, or custom expression to use for the lower error bars.

Note: The chosen column or measure must have numerical values.

   Color

 

      Same as line

Choose this option if you want an error bar to have the same color as the line.

      Custom

Choose this option if you want to use a custom color for the error bars. Click on the drop-down list to show the palette and select a different color.

   Show end caps

Specifies whether or not orthogonal lines should be displayed at the end of the error bars.

   Include error bars in axis range

Sets the automatic zooming so that the error bars are always visible.

Note: The upper and lower errors refer to the underlying data. This means that if you use reversed scales in a visualization, the error bars will also be reversed. For example, for a line chart with reversed Y-axis, the upper error bar will be displayed below the line.

See also:

Line Chart Properties

How to Use the Line Chart

What is a Line Chart?

Error Bars

Combination Chart

What is a Combination Chart?


The combination chart is a visualization that combines the features of the bar chart and the line chart. The combination chart displays the data using a number of bars and/or lines, each of which represent a particular category. A combination of bars and lines in the same visualization can be useful when comparing values in different categories, since the combination gives a clear view of which category is higher or lower. An example of this can be seen when using the combination chart to compare the projected sales with the actual sales for different time periods.

Series

Similarly to the function of Color by in other visualizations, Series by in the combination chart is a way to divide the data into slices. The difference is that the slices in the combination chart, called series, can be defined as bars or lines as well as being colored separately. That is, each series in the combination chart will be represented by a line or a set of bars in the visualization.

Example:

The example below contains two series: the bars represent the projected sales for each month in a year and the line represents the actual sales for the same months. Series by is set to (Column Names) since both series should be shown on the Y-axis. For more information on (Column Names), see the Non-Column Selections page.

WhatisaCombinationChart1.png

Multiple scales can also be used on the Y-axis when you want to compare several lines and bars with significantly different value ranges.

WhatisaCombinationChart2.png

All visualizations can be set up to show data limited by one or more markings in other visualizations only (details visualizations). Combination charts can also be limited by one or more filterings. Another alternative is to set up a combination chart without any filtering at all. See Limiting What is Shown in Visualizations for more information.

See also:

How to Use the Combination Chart

Combination Chart Properties

How to Use the Combination Chart


  • To apply series (split in categories):

  1. In the Filters panel, click and hold down the left mouse button on the filter representing the column that you want to split by series.

    Comment: Series by is also available in the Visualization Properties dialog.

  2. Drag the filter to the center of the visualization.

    Response: Drop targets appear in the middle of the visualization.

  3. Release the mouse button on the Series target.

    Comment: If you want to use multiple columns on the Y-axis, and set each of these as a series, you should select to series by (Column Names) in the legend or the Visualization Properties dialog.

  • To switch between bars and lines:

  1. Click on the bar or line symbol next to the series in the legend and select Show as Bars or Show as Line.

    OR

  2. Right-click on the visualization and select Properties from the pop-up menu.

  3. Go to the Series page, select a series and define it as bars or a line.

    Comment: It is also possible to right-click on the visualization and select Show All as Bars or Show All as Lines to set all series to bars or lines.

  • To mark bars or lines:

  1. Click once on a line or a bar to mark the line or bar.

    Comment: If you have stacked bars, only the bar segment will be marked.

    OR

  2. Click and drag with the mouse to mark all bar segments, bars and parts of lines included in the selection.

    Comment: You can select items in different parts of the visualization by pressing Ctrl and clicking and dragging with the mouse.

  • To sort the combination chart:

  1. Right-click on the visualization and select Properties from the pop-up menu.

  2. Go to the Appearance page.

  3. Select a series to sort the X-axis by.

  • To change the aggregation type:

  1. Click on the axis selector on the Y-axis. This is where it says Sum([Column Name]), Count(...), or similar.

    Response: A drop-down menu is displayed.

  2. Select Aggregation > and a new aggregation measure from the submenu.

    Comment: You can also select Custom Expression... from the menu and create your own expression.

    Response: The combination chart is updated to show the new information.

  • To use multiple columns on one axis:

This is an example of how to use two columns on the Y-axis. The columns will be represented by a line or a set of bars.

  1. Click on the arrow next to the plus sign on the axis of your choice.

  2. Select a new column from the menu.

    Comment: A column can also be dragged and dropped from the filters panel.

  3. Select (Column Names) in the Series by column selector.

    Comment: For more information on (Column Names), see the Non-Column Selections page.

    Response: The columns are represented by a line or a set of bars in the combination chart.

  • To add multiple scales:

  1. Right-click on the Y-axis and select Multiple Scales from the pop-up menu.

    Comment: By default, you will get one scale for each color that is defined under Series by.

  2. You can also go to the Y-axis page in the Visualization Properties dialog and click the Multiple scales radio button. This is also where you change the settings for the different scales and determine whether a certain scale should be located on the left or the right Y-axis.

    Comment: If you are using values from different columns on the various scales, you can also use drag and drop to move columns from one side to another.

  • To add a reference line to the combination chart:

  1. Right-click on the visualization and select Properties from the pop-up menu.

  2. Go to the Lines & Curves page.

  3. Select the check box for any of the default lines or click on Add to define a new line.

    Comment: You can only add lines to the X-axis when it is in continuous mode. Right-click on the scale labels and select Continuous Scale from the pop-up menu.

  • To add a curve fit to the combination chart:

  1. Right-click on the visualization and select Properties from the pop-up menu.

  2. Go to the Lines & Curves page.

  3. Click on Add and select a suitable curve fit from the drop-down menu.

    Comment: You can select from a number of predefined curve fits, or define your own curve using Curve Draw. See Curve Fit Models for more information about the different options.

  4. Once the curve has been created, you can change its settings on the Lines & Curves page. Some of the curve settings are also available from the pop-up menu in the visualization.

  • To create a new combination chart:

  1. Click on the New Combination Chart button on the toolbar, NewCombinationChartButton.png.

    Comment: You can also select Insert > New Visualization > Combination Chart from the menu.

    Response: A first attempt to set up a suitable combination chart is made by the application.

  2. Adjust the combination chart to display the categories and measures of your choice.

    Comment: For more information about how to change what to show on the two axes, see Column Selectors.

See also:

What is a Combination Chart?

Combination Chart Properties

Combination Chart Properties

Combination Chart Properties

The Combination Chart Properties dialog consists of several pages:

  • General

  • Data

  • Appearance

  • Formatting

  • Fonts

  • X-axis

  • Y-axis

  • Series

  • Labels

  • Tooltip

  • Legend

  • Trellis

  • Lines & Curves

  • To reach the Combination Chart Properties dialog:

  1. Right-click on the combination chart visualization.

  2. Select Properties from the pop-up menu.

    Comment: You can also click on the combination chart visualization to make it active and then select Edit > Visualization Properties.

See also:

What is a Combination Chart?

How to Use the Combination Chart

Combination Chart Properties – General

CombinationChartProperties–General.png


Option

Description

Title

The title of the visualization.

Tip: Double-click on the title bar of the visualization for a shortcut to this field.

Show title bar

Specifies whether or not to show the visualization title.

Description

A description of the visualization. This description can optionally be shown in the legend and/or in the visualization.

Show description in visualization

Specifies whether or not to show the description in the visualization.

See also:

Combination Chart Properties

What is a Combination Chart?

How to Use the Combination Chart

Combination Chart Properties – Data

CombinationChartProperties–Data.png

Option

Description

Data table

Specifies the data table on which the visualization will work.

Marking

Specifies the marking (that is, the color and relationships to other marked items) that will be used to mark items in this visualization.

Limit data using markings

Lists the available markings that can be used to limit what is shown in this visualization. This means that the visualization only displays data that has been marked in other visualizations.

If more than one marking is selected, you can choose how the data in the markings should be combined.

New...

Opens the New Marking dialog where you can specify a new marking.

The color and name of a previously created marking is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Rows must be included in

Specifies how the data in the markings should be combined if you have selected to limit the data by more than one marking.

   All markings (AND)
  

Use this option if you want this visualization to show the intersection of the markings selected in Limit data using markings. This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in both markings. This visualization will then show only the data that has been marked using both of the selected markings.

   Any marking (OR)
   

Use this option if you want this visualization to show the union of the markings selected in Limit data using markings.

This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in either of the two markings. This visualization will then show data that has been marked using either of the selected markings.

Limit data using filterings

Defines how different filtering schemes in the analysis should affect this visualization.

Select Use the current filtering from the page if you want the visualization to always utilize the filtering scheme that is used on the page where the visualization is located. If you move the visualization to a new page, then the visualization will automatically start reacting on the filtering scheme that is used on the new page.

Select a specific filtering scheme from the list if you want the visualization to always use that filtering scheme. Moving the visualization to another page with a different filtering scheme will not affect this setting.

If you select to limit data using more than one filtering scheme, the intersection of the filterings will be used. This means that the visualization will show only the data that is made visible by all of the filtering schemes.

New...

Opens the New Filtering Scheme dialog where you can specify a new filtering scheme.

The color and name of a previously created filtering scheme is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Limit data using expression

You can limit what data should be available for a certain visualization using an expression. If you have defined a limiting expression, it will be displayed here.

Edit...

Opens the Limit Data Using Expression dialog where you can define a boolean expression to use for limiting the data in this visualization.

See also:

Combination Chart Properties

What is a Combination Chart?

How to Use the Combination Chart

Combination Chart Properties – Appearance

CombinationChartProperties–Appearance.png

Option

Description

Sort x-axis by

Selecting (None) sorts the contents of the visualization by the natural sort order of the column chosen on the X-axis. However, you can also sort the visualization by any of the Series you have created in the combination chart.

Bars

 

   Layout

 

      Side-by-side bars

Use this option to place bars from the series category side-by-side next to each other instead of stacked on top of each other.

      Stacked bars

Use this option to keep series categories stacked on top of each other.

   Bar width

Drag the slider to modify the width of the bars.

Lines

 

   Line width

Specifies the width of the lines in the combination chart.

   Show line markers

Determines whether or not markers should be displayed for the axis values.

      Marker size

Use the slider to increase or decrease the size of the markers.

   Draw as step lines

Select this check box if you want the lines to be drawn in incremental steps rather than as straight lines directly between each value.

   Break lines on empty values

Determines whether lines should be broken or remain connected when an empty value is found in the data that was used to create the line.

Time series

 

   Compensate for missing values

Select this check box if you are using a Date, Time or DateTime column somewhere in the visualization and you need to perform some calculation where a required time period is missing. For example, if you have created a visualization showing cumulative sums and there are missing data for some categories, selecting this check box will produce a bar or line value of the same size as the previous bar or line value instead of showing no value at all. See Working With Time Hierarchies for more information.

Enabling this setting will temporarily add new rows with empty values for the missing periods so that they can be used in the calculation.

See also:

Combination Chart Properties

What is a Combination Chart?

How to Use the Combination Chart

Combination Chart Properties – Formatting

CombinationChartProperties–Formatting.png

Option

Description

Axes

Displays the column and category currently being used on each of the two axes in the combination chart. Click on the one you want to change the settings for. If the columns on the axes are of the same type, you can set formatting for both axes at the same time. If you use multiple scales in the visualization, each of the different scales on the Y-axis will appear in the list and you can apply formatting to them individually.

Reset

Resets the formatting for the selected axis values according to the settings defined on column level. If no column formatting has been set, axis formatting settings defined in the Options dialog will be used. If no settings have been specified in the Options dialog, the default settings for the visualization type will be used.

Category

Lists the available formatting categories for the selected axis. Each category in this list has separate settings. Which categories are available depends on the data type of the selected axis. See Formatting Settings for a full description of all possible options.

Note: These settings affect only the current visualization. For general information about formatting, see Formatting Overview.

See also:

Combination Chart Properties

What is a Combination Chart?

How to Use the Combination Chart

Formatting Overview

Axis Formatting

Column Properties - Formatting

Combination Chart Properties – Fonts

CombinationChartProperties–Fonts.png

Option

Description

Settings for

Lists all items for which you can change the font settings. Click to select an item in the list to change the font settings for that text in the visualization. Press Ctrl and click on more items to change the settings for multiple items simultaneously.

Font

Specifies the font to use for the selected items.

Font style

Specifies the font style to use for the selected items.

Size

Specifies the font size to use for the selected items.

See also:

Combination Chart Properties

What is a Combination Chart?

How to Use the Combination Chart

Combination Chart Properties – X-axis

CombinationChartProperties–X-axis.png

Option

Description

Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy to be displayed on the X-axis.

Settings...

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog where you can change the scale mode from categorical to continuous and vice versa, as well as changing the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

Range

 

   Min

Determines the lower value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the lowest value currently in the filtered data.

   Max

Determines the upper value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the highest value currently in the filtered data.

   Set to Current Range

Allows you to set the axis range to the currently filtered values.

   Include origin

Available for continuous axes only. Always includes the coordinates (0, 0) in the visualization, regardless of filtering.

   Show zoom slider

Shows a zoom slider that you can manually manipulate to view only those parts of the combination chart you are interested in.

   Show gridlines

Specifies whether or not vertical gridlines should be visible.

Scale labels

 

   Show labels

Specifies whether or not scale labels should be visible.

      Horizontally

Shows scale labels horizontally.

      Vertically

Shows scale labels vertically.

      Max number of labels

Select the check box to specify a maximum number of scale labels to be shown. Limiting the number of labels can improve readability on axis scales with many values.

Scale

 

   Log scale

Available for continuous axes only. Changes the scale from a linear scale to a logarithmic base 10 scale [log10 (x)].

   Reverse scale

Reverses the current sort order, so that the lowest value is displayed at the top of the scale.

See also:

Combination Chart Properties

What is a Combination Chart?

How to Use the Combination Chart

Combination Chart Properties – Y-axis

One Y-axis with a single scale

CombinationChartProperties–Y-axis1.png

Option

Description

Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy to be displayed on the Y-axis.

Settings...

[Not available in this visualization.]

One axis with a single scale

Use this option if you want to show the values from a single column on the Y-axis, or if you have multiple columns that can be presented using the same scale.

Multiple scales

Use this option to show two Y-axes (left and right) with two or more different scales. For example, use it if you want to display two columns of very different magnitudes in the same visualization.

Range

 

   Min

Determines the lower value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the lowest value currently in the filtered data.

   Max

Determines the upper value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the highest value currently in the filtered data.

   Set to Current Range

Allows you to set the axis range to the currently filtered values.

   Include origin

Available for continuous columns only. Always includes the coordinates (0, 0) in the visualization, regardless of filtering.

   Show zoom slider

Shows a zoom slider that you can manually manipulate to view only those parts of the combination chart you are interested in.

Show gridlines

Specifies whether or not horizontal gridlines should be visible.

Scale labels

 

   Show labels

Specifies whether or not scale labels should be visible.

      Horizontally

Shows scale labels horizontally.

      Vertically

Shows scale labels vertically.

      Max number of labels

Select the check box to specify a maximum number of scale labels to be shown. Limiting the number of labels can improve readability on axis scales with many values.

Scale

 

   Reverse scale

Reverses the current sort order, so that the lowest value is displayed at the top of the scale.

Multiple scales

CombinationChartProperties–Y-axis2.png

Option

Description

Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy to be displayed on the Y-axis.

Settings...

[Not available in this visualization.]

One axis with a single scale

Use this option if you want to show the values from a single column on the Y-axis, or if you have multiple columns that can be presented using the same scale.

Multiple scales

Use this option to show two Y-axes (left and right) with two or more different scales. For example, use it if you want to display two columns with values of very different magnitudes in the same visualization.

Individual scaling

 

   For each color

Use this option to display one scale for each category used to color the markers by. For example, if you put two different columns on the Y-axis (like Oil Production and BNP), you can use the (Column Names) option to color by and click this radio button to display one scale for Oil Production and one for BNP.

Do not use this option if you need to color by a large number of different categories.

Note that you should apply true categorical coloring before using this option. If you use a continuous column on the color axis, you may end up with a different result than the expected. This applies even if the continuous color mode looks "categorical" at first sight.

   For each trellis panel

Use this option to display one scale for each trellis panel.

Zoom

 

   Show zoom slider

Shows a zoom slider that you can manually manipulate to view only those parts of the combination chart you are interested in.

   Show gridlines

Specifies whether or not horizontal gridlines should be visible.

Scale labels

 

   Show labels

Specifies whether or not scale labels should be visible. The scale labels are always displayed horizontally when multiple scales are shown.

   Horizontally

Shows scale labels horizontally.

Note: Only available for individual scaling for each trellis panel.

   Vertically

Shows scale labels vertically.

Note: Only available for individual scaling for each trellis panel.

      Max number of labels

Select the check box to specify a maximum number of scale labels to be shown. Limiting the number of labels can improve readability on axis scales with many values.

Individual scale settings

 

   [Drop-down list]

Select the scale for which you wish to change the settings. Select All scales to change settings for all scales simultaneously.

   Scale Range...

Opens the Scale Range dialog where you can specify the range of the selected scale, and also determine whether or not to include the origin (0, 0).

   Position

Specifies which side of the visualization the scales should be positioned.

      Left Y-axis

Select this option to place the selected scale on the left-hand side of the visualization.

      Right Y-axis

Select this option to place the selected scale on the right-hand side of the visualization.

   Reverse scale

Reverses the current sort order so that the lowest value is displayed at the top of the scale.

See also:

Combination Chart Properties

What is a Combination Chart?

How to Use the Combination Chart

Combination Chart Properties – Series

CombinationChartProperties–Series.png

Option

Description

Series by

Select the column to set series by.
Note: If you have more than one column on the Y-axis, you need to series by (Column Names) to be able to display all columns in the same visualization.

Settings...

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog where you can change the scale mode for the selected column or hierarchy from continuous to categorical and vice versa, as well as changing the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

Series

Lists the series in the combination chart. Select a series to be able to apply changes to it.

Type

Select whether the series should be displayed as bars or as a line.

Color

Specify a color for the selected series.

See also:

Combination Chart Properties

What is a Combination Chart?

How to Use the Combination Chart

Combination Chart Properties – Labels

CombinationChartProperties–Labels.png

Option

Description

Show labels for

Determines whether to show labels on all bars and lines (All), bars and lines containing marked rows only (Marked rows), or not to show any labels at all (None).

Bars

 

   Show bar labels

Determines whether or not to show labels for the bars in the visualization.

   Label orientation

Determines whether to display the labels horizontally or vertically.

Show line marker labels

Determines whether or not to show labels for the line markers in the visualization.

Max number of labels

Specifies the maximum number of labels to be shown.

See also:

Combination Chart Properties

What is a Combination Chart?

How to Use the Combination Chart

Combination Chart Properties – Tooltip

CombinationChartProperties–Tooltip.png

Option

Description

Display the following values

Specifies what will be shown in the tooltip.

Add...

Opens the Add Tooltip Value dialog, where you can add the content from another column, hierarchy, or any custom expression to be shown in the tooltip. You can also use images in tooltips. See Highlighting in Visualizations for more information.

Edit...

Opens the Edit Tooltip Value dialog, where you can change the information to be shown in the tooltip.

Delete

Deletes the selected value from the list.

Move Up

Moves the selected value up in the list and, hence, up in the tooltip.

Move Down

Moves the selected value down in the list and, hence, down in the tooltip.

Tooltip format

 

   Value names and values

Shows the tooltip content in a format where the selected column name, hierarchy or custom expression is displayed. For example, Year: 2003, Type: Cucumber, etc.

   Visualization properties and values

Shows the tooltip content in a format where the visualization property for each value is displayed. For example, X: 2003, Color: Cucumber, etc.

See also:

Combination Chart Properties

What is a Combination Chart?

How to Use the Combination Chart

Combination Chart Properties – Legend

CombinationChartProperties–Legend.png

Option

Description

Show legend

Specifies whether or not the docked legend should be shown in the visualization.

Position

Specifies which side of the visualization the legend should be positioned: the right-hand side or the left-hand side.

Display the following legend items

Specifies what will be shown in the legend.

By clearing a check box you will completely hide that item from the legend. You can also select to show or hide parts of the legend information using the check boxes under Settings for the selected item in the list, see below.

Settings

Defines how the selected legend item should be displayed. The available options vary between legend items.

   Show title

Use this option to show or hide the title for the selected item. The title is typically what is displayed above an axis selector or similar:

CrossTableProperties–LegendInsert1.png

   Show axis selector

Select this option to show or hide the axis selector for the selected item.

CrossTableProperties–LegendInsert1.png

See also:

Combination Chart Properties

What is a Combination Chart?

How to Use the Combination Chart

Combination Chart Properties – Trellis

CombinationChartProperties–Trellis.gif

Option

Description

Rows and columns

Splits the visualization into different panels for all categories in the selected column or hierarchy. The number of values in the specified column or hierarchy controls the number of panels to be displayed in each row, column, or page, respectively.

   Rows

A row with trellis panels will be created for each value in the selected column or hierarchy.

   Columns

A column with trellis panels will be created for each value in the selected column or hierarchy.

   Pages

A new page with trellis panels will be created for each value in the selected column or hierarchy. Scroll down in the visualization to see the next page.

Panels

Splits the visualization into different panels for all categories in the selected column or hierarchy, without binding any dimensions to either rows or columns. This means that the number of actual values in the column to split by does not control the number of shown rows or columns in any way.

The number of panels that should be visible on each page is instead specified using the Max number of rows and Max number of columns controls below.

   Split by

Specifies the column or hierarchy to define the categories by which the visualization should be split.

   Manual layout

Select the check box to manually specify the number of rows and columns that should be visible without scrolling. If the check box is cleared, the application will automatically specify the number of rows and columns.

   Max number of rows

Specifies the maximum number of panels that should be visible on each page.

   Max number of columns

Specifies the maximum number of panels that should be visible on each page.

Settings...

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog where you can change the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

See also:

Combination Chart Properties

What is a Combination Chart?

How to Use the Combination Chart

Combination Chart Properties – Lines & Curves

CombinationChartProperties–Lines&Curves.png

First part of the dialog

Option

Description

Visible lines and curves

Lists the currently added lines and curves. If a checkmark is shown in the check box, then the reference line is shown in the visualization. Clear the check box to hide a line or curve.

New lines and curves can be added to this list by clicking on the Add button; see below.

Add

Displays a menu where you can select which type of line or curve to add to the list of available lines and curves, and in some cases, opens a dialog where you can specify settings to use for that line or curve.

For more information about the different curve types, see Curve Fit Models.

Edit...

Opens a dialog where you can change the settings for the selected line or curve (when applicable).

Remove

Removes the selected line or curve from the list of available lines and curves.

More

 

   Duplicate

Duplicates the currently selected line or curve. This can be particularly useful if you want to add one static curve that is calculated on the whole data set (select the Update curve manually check box) and another one that is changed upon filtering (default).

   Export Curve Fit Result...

Opens a dialog where you can choose to export the curve fit result for the selected curve to a text file or to Microsoft® Excel®. The text file can be either a regular tab separated text file, or a Spotfire Text Data Format file, which contains a bit more information about the columns (types, etc.). The Excel file can be either an XLS file or an XLSX file.

Settings

Option

Description

Appearance

Determines the color, style and width of lines and curves, and the color, style and size of points.

Place in

Select whether to place the line, curve or point in the Foreground or Background of the visualization.

Transparency

Determines the transparency of the selected line, curve or point. That is, the degree to which the markers can be seen through it. The transparency is strongly connected to the color.

Label and Tooltip

Opens a dialog where you can determine what information to show in the label and/or tooltip for the selected line, curve or point.

Included in axis range

Sets the automatic zooming so that the line, curve or point is always shown, even if it lies far from the currently filtered values.

Update manually

Select the check box to "freeze" the line or curve so that it is not automatically recalculated upon filtering. You can update the line or curve by clicking the Update button below or by right-clicking in the visualization and selecting Update Lines and Curves and clicking on the one you want to update.

Note: Not applicable for points.

Update

When a line or curve has been specified to be manually updated, use this button to perform the update.

One per

Determines whether to show one line or curve per Color and/or Trellis panel.

Note: Not applicable for points.

Note that you should apply true categorical coloring before using the color option. If you use a continuous column on the color axis, you may end up with a different result than the expected. This applies even if the continuous color mode looks "categorical" at first sight.

See also:

Combination Chart Properties

What is a Combination Chart?

How to Use the Combination Chart

Lines and Curves

Details on Reference Line

Pie Chart

What is a Pie Chart?

Pie charts are circle graphs divided into sectors, each pie sector displaying the size of some related piece of information. Pie charts are used to show the relative sizes of the parts of a whole.

Example:

WhatisaPieChart.png

All visualizations can be set up to show data limited by one or more markings in other visualizations only (details visualizations). Pie charts can also be limited by one or more filterings. Another alternative is to set up a pie chart without any filtering at all. See Limiting What is Shown in Visualizations for more information.

See also:

How to Use the Pie Chart

Pie Chart Properties

How to Use the Pie Chart


  • To set which column represents the size of the sectors:

  1. In the Filters panel, click and hold down the left mouse button on the filter representing the column you want to represent the size of the sectors.

  2. Drag the filter to the center of the visualization.

    Response: Drop targets appear in the middle of the visualization.

  3. Release the mouse button on the sector size drop target.

    Response: The sectors are adjusted so that the size is according the corresponding values of the column.

  4. From the Legend, click on the Sector Size by button, and select Aggregation.

  5. Select whether you want each sector size to be the sum or average (or other type of aggregation) of the selected column.

  • To sort the sectors of the pie chart:

  1. Right-click on the visualization to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Properties.

  3. Go to the Appearance page.

  4. Select the Sort sectors by size check box.

  • To create a new pie chart:

  1. Click on the New Pie Chart button on the toolbar, NewPieChartBUtton.png.

    Comment: You can also select Insert > New Visualization > Pie Chart from the menu.

    Response: A first attempt to set up a suitable pie chart is made by the application.

  2. Adjust the pie chart to display the data of your choice.

See also:

What is a Pie Chart?

Pie Chart Properties

Pie Chart Properties

Pie Chart Properties

The Pie Chart Properties dialog consists of several pages:

  • General

  • Data

  • Appearance

  • Fonts

  • Colors

  • Size

  • Labels

  • Tooltip

  • Legend

  • Trellis

  • To reach the Pie Chart Properties dialog:

  1. Right-click on the pie chart visualization.

  2. Select Properties from the pop-up menu.

    Comment: You can also click on the pie chart visualization to make it active and then select Edit > Visualization Properties.

See also:

What is a Pie Chart?

How to Use the Pie Chart

Pie Chart Properties – General

PieChartProperties–General.png


Option

Description

Title

The title of the visualization.

Tip: Double-click on the title bar of the visualization for a shortcut to this field.

Show title bar

Specifies whether or not to show the visualization title.

Description

A description of the visualization. This description can optionally be shown in the legend and/or in the visualization.

Show description in visualization

Specifies whether or not to show the description in the visualization.

See also:

Pie Chart Properties

How to Use the Pie Chart

What is a Pie Chart?

Pie Chart Properties – Data

PieChartProperties–Data.png


Option

Description

Data table

Specifies the data table on which the visualization will work.

Marking

Specifies the marking (that is, the color and relationships to other marked items) that will be used to mark items in this visualization.

Limit data using markings

Lists the available markings that can be used to limit what is shown in this visualization. This means that the visualization only displays data that has been marked in other visualizations.

If more than one marking is selected, you can choose how the data in the markings should be combined.

New...

Opens the New Marking dialog where you can specify a new marking.

The color and name of a previously created marking is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Rows must be included in

Specifies how the data in the markings should be combined if you have selected to limit the data by more than one marking.

   All markings (AND)
  

Use this option if you want this visualization to show the intersection of the markings selected in Limit data using markings. This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in both markings. This visualization will then show only the data that has been marked using both of the selected markings.

   Any marking (OR)
   

Use this option if you want this visualization to show the union of the markings selected in Limit data using markings.

This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in either of the two markings. This visualization will then show data that has been marked using either of the selected markings.

Limit data using filterings

Defines how different filtering schemes in the analysis should affect this visualization.

Select Use the current filtering from the page if you want the visualization to always utilize the filtering scheme that is used on the page where the visualization is located. If you move the visualization to a new page, then the visualization will automatically start reacting on the filtering scheme that is used on the new page.

Select a specific filtering scheme from the list if you want the visualization to always use that filtering scheme. Moving the visualization to another page with a different filtering scheme will not affect this setting.

If you select to limit data using more than one filtering scheme, the intersection of the filterings will be used. This means that the visualization will show only the data that is made visible by all of the filtering schemes.

New...

Opens the New Filtering Scheme dialog where you can specify a new filtering scheme.

The color and name of a previously created filtering scheme is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Limit data using expression

You can limit what data should be available for a certain visualization using an expression. If you have defined a limiting expression, it will be displayed here.

Edit...

Opens the Limit Data Using Expression dialog where you can define a boolean expression to use for limiting the data in this visualization.

See also:

Pie Chart Properties

How to Use the Pie Chart

What is a Pie Chart?

Pie Chart Properties – Appearance

PieChartProperties–Appearance.png

Option

Description

Sort sectors by size

This option sorts the sectors of the pie chart, so that the largest sector is placed next to the second largest sector, and so forth.

See also:

Pie Chart Properties

How to Use the Pie Chart

What is a Pie Chart?

Pie Chart Properties – Fonts

PieChartProperties–Fonts.png

Option

Description

Settings for

Lists all items for which you can change the font settings. Click to select an item in the list to change the font settings for that text in the visualization. Press Ctrl and click on more items to change the settings for multiple items simultaneously.

Font

Specifies the font to use for the selected items.

Font style

Specifies the font style to use for the selected items.

Size

Specifies the font size to use for the selected items.

See also:

Pie Chart Properties

How to Use the Pie Chart

What is a Pie Chart?

Pie Chart Properties – Colors

PieChartProperties–Colors.png

Option

Description

Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy to color by. Pie charts can only be colored by categories, therefore continuous columns will be auto-binned. See What is Binning? to learn more about binned columns.

Settings

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog. The upper part of the dialog is grayed out, because it concerns scale mode, which cannot be changed for pie charts. In the lower part you can change the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

Color mode

Specifies in which color mode to set up the color scheme. You can select either Categorical or Fixed color mode. To learn more about the color modes, see Color Modes Overview.

One scale per

Not applicable to pie charts. Available for continuous columns only.

ColorSchemeMenu.png

[Color Schemes menu]

Opens a menu where you can select an already existing color scheme and apply it to the visualization, or apply the currently open color scheme to another visualization in the analysis.

   From Visualization

Lets you select a color scheme from another visualization in the analysis. Only color schemes that are applicable to the current color scheme will be listed.

   Document Color Schemes

Lets you select a color scheme that has previously been saved within the analysis. Only color schemes that are applicable to the current color scheme will be listed. This menu option is only available if one or more document color schemes already exist.

   Open from Library...

Opens the Open from Library dialog where you can select a color scheme that has previously been saved to the library.

   Open from File...

Opens a dialog where you can select a previously saved color scheme.

   Save As

Lets you save a color scheme as a library item, a local file or a document color scheme.

Library Item – Opens the Save as Library Item dialog, where you can specify a location in the library and a file name to save the currently open color scheme for later reuse.

File – Opens a dialog where you can specify a location and a file name to save your currently open color scheme locally on your computer for later reuse.

Document Color Scheme – Opens the Save Document Color Scheme dialog, where you can specify a name and save the currently open color scheme for later reuse within the analysis.

   Apply to Visualizations...

Opens the Apply to Visualizations dialog where you can select other visualizations (within the analysis) that you want to apply the current color scheme to. Only visualizations with compatible color schemes are listed.

Note: If you apply a color scheme to a table, cross table, or heat map, the coloring will not take effect immediately. The color scheme will be added as an empty color scheme grouping, and you must select which columns or axis values to include in the grouping by opening the Edit Color Scheme Grouping dialog.

[Color scheme area]

The area in the lower part of the dialog shows the current color scheme. That is, the colors and values currently used in the visualization. You can modify color schemes in numerous ways to give the visualization the appearance you prefer. The color scheme area will look different, and have different available settings, depending on the characteristics of the column used to color the visualization by, as well as the selected color mode. To learn more about color schemes and color modes, see Color Schemes Overview and Color Modes Overview respectively.

Add Point

Not applicable to pie charts. Available for continuous columns only.

Delete Point

Not applicable to pie charts. Available for continuous columns only.

Add Rule...

Opens the Add Rule dialog where you can define a rule that functions as an exception to the rest of the defined color scheme. A rule has higher priority than the rest of the color scheme. For example, you can define a rule to give the top five items in your data a different color than the rest of the items. If you add many rules to a color scheme, the rules are prioritized from top to bottom. Which rule types are available depends on the characteristics of the column or hierarchy used to color the visualization by. See Details on Add/Edit Rule for full descriptions of the rule types.

Reset

Resets the color scheme to the one that was in effect when the visualization was created. Any added rules will be removed. Which color scheme should be used by default when you create a new visualization is defined in the Visualization page of the Options dialog.

Note: The color of marked items is changed under Edit > Document Properties.

See also:

Pie Chart Properties

How to Use the Pie Chart

What is a Pie Chart?

Pie Chart Properties – Size

PieChartProperties–Size1.png

Option

Description

Sector size by

Specifies a column or hierarchy whose categories will determine the size of the pie sectors. This is always an aggregated measure.

Pie size

Specifies the absolute pie size within the visualization area.

Pie size by

Sizes the pies according to the values in the specified column. Only relevant when there are more than one pie available (via trellising).

Scale

Determines what scale to use for the size of the pie. Only relevant when there are more than one pie available (via trellising).

   From min to max

Assigns the maximum pie size to the highest value, and the minimum pie size to the lowest value. For instance, if the minimum and maximum data values are -9 and 11 the pie sizes could be like the following:

PieChartProperties–Size2.png

This mode is useful when you want to visualize differences.

      Min limit
     Max limit

The minimum and maximum limits that should be mapped to the pie size. By default, they are set to "Automatic". This means that the pie size will adapt during filtering. If the scale is set to "From min to max", the current minimum value will have the minimum pie size, and the current maximum value will have the maximum pie size. It is comparable to automatic zooming on the X- or Y-axis.

It is possible to lock max limit and/or min limit to a specific value by selecting "Value" in the drop-down list and entering a value. Data values that are lower than the minimum value or higher than the maximum value will not get a size and are not drawn. By setting the lower value to 0, negative values can be removed. By specifying both a high and low value, the auto-scaling behavior is turned off.

   From 0 to max
  absolute value

This mode is useful when you want to compare the magnitude of measures. By letting the value 0 map to pie size 0, and the maximum value to the maximum pie size, it is possible to compare the diameter of pie and say "a" is twice as big as "b". So with this scale the values 50 and 100 would be rendered like this:

PieChartProperties–Size3.png

Note: The size is scaled symmetrically around 0 with absolute numbers. That is, if your highest value is 10 and your lowest is -20, the size of the pie at 10 will be 50 percent of the maximum pie size.

      Max

The absolute limit that should be mapped to the pie size. By default, it is set to "Automatic". This means that the marker size will adapt during filtering. The value 0 will have the minimum pie size and the highest absolute value in the visualization will have the maximum pie size.

It is possible to lock this to a specific value by selecting "Value" in the drop-down list and entering a value. Data values that have a larger absolute value than the set value will get the same size as the maximum value.

See also:

Pie Chart Properties

How to Use the Pie Chart

What is a Pie Chart?

Pie Chart Properties – Labels

PieChartProperties–Labels.png

Option

Description

Show in labels

Specifies what information to show in the labels for the pie sectors.

   Sector percentage

Displays labels showing the percentage of the total that each sector represents.

   Sector value

Displays the value of the sector. For example, sum of sales for apples, if the sector size is defined by sum of sales and the color is defined by fruit or vegetable type.

   Sector category

Displays the category defining the sector. For example, "apples", if the sector color is defined by fruit or vegetable type.

Label position

Specifies whether the labels should be placed Inside pie or Outside pie.

Show labels for

Determines whether to show labels for all pie sectors (All), pie sectors containing marked rows only (Marked rows), or not to show any labels at all (None).

Max number of labels

Specifies the maximum number of labels to be shown.

Sector percentage threshold

Excludes the labels for the sectors whose percentage falls below the specified threshold value.

Sector percentage decimals

Specifies the number of decimals to display for the percentage value. The number specified here will also affect the number of decimals shown for pie sectors in the tooltip.

See also:

Pie Chart Properties

How to Use the Pie Chart

What is a Pie Chart?

Pie Chart Properties – Tooltip

PieChartProperties–Tooltip.png

Option

Description

Display the following values

Specifies what will be shown in the tooltip.

Add...

Opens the Add Tooltip Value dialog, where you can add the content from another column, hierarchy, or any custom expression to be shown in the tooltip. You can also use images in tooltips. See Highlighting in Visualizations for more information.

Edit...

Opens the Edit Tooltip Value dialog, where you can change the information to be shown in the tooltip.

Delete

Deletes the selected value from the list.

Move Up

Moves the selected value up in the list and, hence, up in the tooltip.

Move Down

Moves the selected value down in the list and, hence, down in the tooltip.

Tooltip format

 

   Value names and values

Shows the tooltip content in a format where the selected column name, hierarchy or custom expression is displayed. For example, Year: 2003, Type: Cucumber, etc.

   Visualization properties and values

Shows the tooltip content in a format where the visualization property for each value is displayed. For example, X: 2003, Color: Cucumber, etc.

See also:

Pie Chart Properties

How to Use the Pie Chart

What is a Pie Chart?

Pie Chart Properties – Legend

PieChartProperties–Legend.png

Option

Description

Show legend

Specifies whether or not the docked legend should be shown in the visualization.

Position

Specifies which side of the visualization the legend should be positioned: the right-hand side or the left-hand side.

Display the following legend items

Specifies what will be shown in the legend.

By clearing a check box you will completely hide that item from the legend. You can also select to show or hide parts of the legend information using the check boxes under Settings for the selected item in the list, see below.

Settings

Defines how the selected legend item should be displayed. The available options vary between legend items.

   Show title

Use this option to show or hide the title for the selected item. The title is typically what is displayed above an axis selector or similar:

CrossTableProperties–LegendInsert1.png

   Show axis selector

Select this option to show or hide the axis selector for the selected item.

CrossTableProperties–LegendInsert1.png

See also:

Pie Chart Properties

How to Use the Pie Chart

What is a Pie Chart?

Pie Chart Properties – Trellis

PieChartProperties–Trellis.png

Option

Description

Rows and columns

Splits the visualization into different panels for all categories in the selected column or hierarchy. The number of values in the specified column or hierarchy controls the number of panels to be displayed in each row, column, or page, respectively.

   Rows

A row with trellis panels will be created for each value in the selected column or hierarchy.

   Columns

A column with trellis panels will be created for each value in the selected column or hierarchy.

   Pages

A new page with trellis panels will be created for each value in the selected column or hierarchy. Scroll down in the visualization to see the next page.

Panels

Splits the visualization into different panels for all categories in the selected column or hierarchy, without binding any dimensions to either rows or columns. This means that the number of actual values in the column to split by does not control the number of shown rows or columns in any way.

The number of panels that should be visible on each page is instead specified using the Max number of rows and Max number of columns controls below.

   Split by

Specifies the column or hierarchy to define the categories by which the visualization should be split.

   Manual layout

Select the check box to manually specify the number of rows and columns that should be visible without scrolling. If the check box is cleared, the application will automatically specify the number of rows and columns.

   Max number of rows

Specifies the maximum number of panels that should be visible on each page.

   Max number of columns

Specifies the maximum number of panels that should be visible on each page.

Settings...

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog where you can change the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

See also:

Pie Chart Properties

How to Use the Pie Chart

What is a Pie Chart?

Scatter Plot

What is a Scatter Plot?


Scatter plots are used to plot data points on a horizontal and a vertical axis in the attempt to show how much one variable is affected by another. Each row in the data table is represented by a marker whose position depends on its values in the columns set on the X and Y axes.

A third variable can be set to correspond to the color or size of the markers, thus adding yet another dimension to the plot.  

The relationship between two variables is called their correlation. If the markers are close to making a straight line in the scatter plot, the two variables have a high correlation. If the markers are equally distributed in the scatter plot, the correlation is low, or zero. However, even though a correlation may seem to be present, this might not always be the case. Both variables could be related to some third variable, thus explaining their variation, or, pure coincidence might cause an apparent correlation.

Example:

In the scatter plot below, sales is plotted against cost for a number of different products (colored by product), to display a low positive correlation.

WhatisaScatterPlot1.png

Each product can be shown separately using trellising:

WhatisaScatterPlot2.png

The scatter plot can also be used together with aggregation (for example, Sum or Average) by using the setting Marker By. In this case, the values for a certain category are bundled together to display a single marker for each category. The aggregated markers can also be sized by the count of items within each category, or by any other column.

Example:

The markers now show the Sum of Sales for each product, as you can see on the axis selector for the Y-axis.

WhatisaScatterPlot3.png

Multiple scales can also be used on the Y-axis, when you want to compare several markers with significantly different value ranges.

Labels can be used in visualizations to identify and describe markers and the data associated with them.

Example:

In the scatter plot below, labels show which category each of the marked markers belongs to.

WhatisaScatterPlot4.png

In a scatter plot, you can interact with the labels and move them using drag-and-drop operations. Click on a label to mark the corresponding marker, and mouseover a label to highlight both the label and the marker. If you move a label, it will stay in the new position until you reset the label positions from the right-click menu in the visualization. If you select to show labels for all markers, the labels will be visible for all markers at all times. You can also select to show labels for marked markers only. Labels will then appear every time you mark one or many markers. To add labels and/or change label settings, open the Labels page of the Scatter Plot Properties dialog.

You can change the shapes of the markers to add another dimension to the visualization, or to get a view that better suits your data. For example, you can have the marker shapes correspond to the different values in a column, or display the markers as pie charts. Another option is to use tiled markers. This means that all the markers will have the same size, and be displayed in a grid-like layout as seen in the example below.

Example:

WhatisaScatterPlot5.png

This example shows the results of an experiment conducted on an assay plate consisting of 96 wells. Each marker in the scatter plot represents a well on the assay plate, and the markers’ colors represent the results of the experiment for each of the wells on the plate. Using this setup to copy the actual layout of the assay plate is a way to enhance the readability of the data. It becomes easy to notice that the well represented by the marker G2 stands out compared to the other wells. Labels are always centered and displayed directly on tiled markers. Therefore, they cannot be moved around as is otherwise possible in a scatter plot.

Note: If you use tiled markers, and the axes’ scales have a large number of values, then the markers may become too small to be seen. The reason for this is that the grid layout makes it necessary for each value on the scales to have a unique position, even if no marker is located at each of these allocated positions. Therefore, with a large number of values on the scale, the markers must become very small to fit in the grid.

All visualizations can be set up to show data limited by one or more markings in other visualizations only (details visualizations). Scatter plots can also be limited by one or more filterings. Another alternative is to set up a scatter plot without any filtering at all. See Limiting What is Shown in Visualizations for more information.

See also:

How to Use the Scatter Plot

Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the Scatter Plot


  • To apply coloring:

  1. In the filters panel, click and hold down the left mouse button on the filter representing the column that you want to color by.

    Comment: Coloring is also available in the Visualization Properties dialog. The color of marked items is changed under Edit > Document Properties.

  2. Drag the filter to the center of the visualization.

    Response: Drop targets appear in the middle of the visualization.

  3. Release the mouse button on the Color target.

    Response: The markers are colored with one color for each category in the selected column.

    Comment: To learn more about coloring in Spotfire, see Coloring Overview.

  • To shape markers by a column:

  1. In the filters panel, click and hold down the left mouse button on the filter representing the column that you want to shape by.

    Comment: Shape is also available in the Properties dialog.

  2. Drag the filter to the center of the visualization.

    Comment: Drop targets appear in the middle of the visualization.

  3. Release the mouse button on the Shape by target.

    Response: The markers are shaped with one shape for each category in the selected column.

    Comment: In the Shape page of the Properties dialog you can also change the fixed shape, or select pies as shape. To use pies, you must first aggregate the markers, as described below.

  • To aggregate markers:

  1. Right-click in the scatter plot to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Properties.

    Comment: If the Legend is visible, the Marker by property may also be changed there.

  3. Click to display the Marker By page.

  4. Select a column to group the markers by under Show one marker for each. You can also select Remove to get the option (None) on the Marker By selector. If (None) is selected then the number of markers shown will depend on other properties only, such as which columns are selected on the axes or used to color by. None is often a good alternative if you intend to use pies as shape.

    Response: The markers are grouped so that a single marker is shown for each category in the selected column.

    Comment: Select (Row Number) to remove the aggregation and show one marker for each row.

  • To use multiple columns on one axis:

This is an example of how to use two columns on the Y-axis. Each column will be represented by a set of colored markers.

  1. Click on the arrow next to the plus sign on the axis of your choice.

  2. Select a new column from the menu.
    Comment: A column can also be dragged and dropped from the filters panel.

  3. Select (Column Names) in the Color By drop down list.
    Response: The markers are colored with one color for each column.
    Comment: For more information on (Column Names), see the Non-Column Selections page.

  • To add multiple scales:

  1. Right-click on the Y-axis and select Multiple Scales from the pop-up menu.

    Comment: By default, you will get one scale for each color that is defined under Color By.

  2. You can also go to the Y-axis page in the Visualization Properties dialog and click the Multiple scales radio button. This is also where you change the settings for the different scales and determine whether a certain scale should be located on the left or the right Y-axis.

    Comment: If you are using values from different columns on the various scales, you can also use drag and drop to move columns from one side to another.

  • To add a reference line to the scatter plot:

  1. Right-click on the visualization to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Properties.

  3. Go to the Lines & Curves page.

  4. Select the check box for any of the default lines or click on Add to define a new horizontal or vertical line.

    Comment: You can only add lines to the axes when they are in continuous mode. Right-click on the scale labels and select Continuous Scale from the pop-up menu.

  5. To add a curve fit to the scatter plot:

  1. Right-click on the visualization to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Properties.

  3. Go to the Lines & Curves page.

  4. Click on Add and select a suitable curve fit from the drop-down menu.

    Comment: You can select from a number of predefined curve fits, or define your own curve using Curve Draw. See Curve Fit Models for more information about the different options.

  5. Once the curve has been created, you can change its settings on the Lines & Curves page. Some of the curve settings are also available from the pop-up menu in the visualization.

  • To add error bars to the scatter plot:

  1. Right-click in the visualization to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Properties.

  3. Go to the Error Bars page.

  4. In the Visible error bars list, select the column or measure to use, and select the check box next to it.

    Response: The settings for the selected column or measure will be displayed in the lower part of the dialog.

    Comment: Only columns and measures with numerical values are listed.

  5. To define an upper error, choose a column or measure in the Upper error column selector. To define a lower error, choose a column or measure in the Lower error column selector.

    Response: The defined error bars appear in the visualization.

    Comment: Error bars can only be used on numerical values.

  • To display images in labels:

This is an example of how you can use a binary column containing image information to label the markers in a scatter plot. You can of course use regular text labels or a number of other settings instead. See the Scatter Plot Properties - Labels page for more information about your available labeling options.

  1. Right-click in the visualization to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Properties.

  3. Go to the Labels page.

  4. Select the column containing images under Label by.

    Comment: This example assumes that you have the images available as a binary column in your current data table. If you intend to retrieve images via an information link you need to select an identifier column instead, and then use a different option under Get content from (e.g., Structure Column) to map the ID to the requested image.

  5. Determine whether to Show labels for All rows, Marked rows or None.

  6. If desired, modify the Max number of labels to limit the amount of shown labels further.

  7. (If required, select an option under Get content from to convert the selected column values to another form of output. See the comment on step 4.)

  8. Make sure that Show as is set to Image (or whatever the type of output is that you wish to display).
    Comment: If you are running TIBCO Spotfire Lead Discovery and select a Structure Column as the transform then you would typically select a structure renderer here instead.

  9. If desired, change the Size of the labels by dragging the slider.

  • To display images in tooltips:

This is an example of how you can use a binary column containing image information in the tooltip shown when hovering with the mouse pointer over the markers in a scatter plot. You can of course use regular text tooltips instead. See the Scatter Plot Properties - Tooltip page for more information about your available tooltip options.

  1. Right-click in the visualization to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Properties.

  3. Go to the Tooltip page.

  4. Click Add....

    Response: The Add Tooltip Value dialog is displayed.

  5. Select the Column containing images.

    Comment: This example assumes that you have the images available as a binary column in your current data table. If you intend to retrieve images via an information link you need to select an identifier column instead, and then use a different option under Get content from (e.g., Structure Column) to map the ID to the requested image.

  6. If desired, change the display Name.

  7. (If required, select an option under Get content from to convert the selected column values to another form of output. See the comment on step 5.)

  8. Make sure that Show as is set to Image (or whatever the type of output is that you wish to display).
    Comment: If you are running TIBCO Spotfire Lead Discovery and select a Structure Column as the transform then you would typically select a structure renderer here instead.

  9. If desired, change the Size of the labels by dragging the slider.

  10. Select whether or not to Include value name in tooltip.

  11. Click OK.

  • To create a new scatter plot:

  1. Click on the New Scatter Plot button on the toolbar, NewScatterPlotButton.png.

    Comment: You can also select Insert > New Visualization > Scatter Plot from the menu.

    Response: A first attempt to set up a suitable scatter plot is made by the application.

  2. Adjust the scatter plot to display the measures of your choice.

    Comment: For more information about how to change what to show on the two axes, see Column Selectors.

See also:

What is a Scatter Plot?

Scatter Plot Properties

Scatter Plot Properties

Scatter Plot Properties

The Scatter Plot Properties dialog consists of several pages:

  • General

  • Data

  • Appearance

  • Formatting

  • Fonts

  • X-axis

  • Y-axis

  • Colors

  • Size

  • Shape

  • Labels

  • Tooltip

  • Legend

  • Trellis

  • Line Connection

  • Marker By

  • Lines & Curves

  • Error Bars

  • To reach the Scatter Plot Properties dialog:

  1. Right-click on the scatter plot visualization.

  2. Select Properties from the pop-up menu.

    Comment: You can also click on the scatter plot visualization to make it active and then select Edit > Visualization Properties.

See also:

What is a Scatter Plot?

How to Use the Scatter Plot

Scatter Plot Properties – General

ScatterPlotProperties–General.png


Option

Description

Title

The title of the visualization.

Tip: Double-click on the title bar of the visualization for a shortcut to this field.

Show title bar

Specifies whether or not to show the visualization title.

Description

A description of the visualization. This description can optionally be shown in the legend and/or in the visualization.

Show description in visualization

Specifies whether or not to show the description in the visualization.

See also:

Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the Scatter Plot

What is a Scatter Plot?

Scatter Plot Properties – Data

ScatterPlotProperties–Data.png

Option

Description

Data table

Specifies the data table on which the visualization will work.

Marking

Specifies the marking (that is, the color and relationships to other marked items) that will be used to mark items in this visualization.

Limit data using markings

Lists the available markings that can be used to limit what is shown in this visualization. This means that the visualization only displays data that has been marked in other visualizations.

If more than one marking is selected, you can choose how the data in the markings should be combined.

New...

Opens the New Marking dialog where you can specify a new marking.

The color and name of a previously created marking is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Rows must be included in

Specifies how the data in the markings should be combined if you have selected to limit the data by more than one marking.

   All markings (AND)
  

Use this option if you want this visualization to show the intersection of the markings selected in Limit data using markings. This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in both markings. This visualization will then show only the data that has been marked using both of the selected markings.

   Any marking (OR)
   

Use this option if you want this visualization to show the union of the markings selected in Limit data using markings.

This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in either of the two markings. This visualization will then show data that has been marked using either of the selected markings.

Limit data using filterings

Defines how different filtering schemes in the analysis should affect this visualization.

Select Use the current filtering from the page if you want the visualization to always utilize the filtering scheme that is used on the page where the visualization is located. If you move the visualization to a new page, then the visualization will automatically start reacting on the filtering scheme that is used on the new page.

Select a specific filtering scheme from the list if you want the visualization to always use that filtering scheme. Moving the visualization to another page with a different filtering scheme will not affect this setting.

If you select to limit data using more than one filtering scheme, the intersection of the filterings will be used. This means that the visualization will show only the data that is made visible by all of the filtering schemes.

New...

Opens the New Filtering Scheme dialog where you can specify a new filtering scheme.

The color and name of a previously created filtering scheme is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Limit data using expression

You can limit what data should be available for a certain visualization using an expression. If you have defined a limiting expression, it will be displayed here.

Edit...

Opens the Limit Data Using Expression dialog where you can define a boolean expression to use for limiting the data in this visualization.

See also:

Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the Scatter Plot

What is a Scatter Plot?

Scatter Plot Properties – Appearance

ScatterPlotProperties–Appearance.png

Option

Description

Jittering

Jittering is an option that displaces the visualization items randomly in the display window, thereby making overlapping markers visible.

   X

Specifies the amount of jittering to use in the horizontal direction.

   Y

Specifies the amount of jittering to use in the vertical direction.

   Use the same amount of jittering for both X and Y

Select this check box to connect the jittering sliders in both directions to each other.

See also:

Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the Scatter Plot

What is a Scatter Plot?

Scatter Plot Properties – Formatting

ScatterPlotProperties–Formatting.png

Option

Description

Axes

Displays which column and category are currently being used on each of the two axes in the scatter plot. Click on the one you want to change the settings for. If the columns on the axes are of the same type, you can set formatting for both axes at the same time. If you use multiple scales in the visualization, each of the different scales on the Y-axis will appear in the list, and you can apply formatting to them individually.

Reset

Resets the formatting for the selected axis values according to the settings defined on column level. If no column formatting has been set, axis formatting settings defined in the Options dialog will be used. If no settings have been specified in the Options dialog, the default settings for the visualization type will be used.

Category

Lists the available formatting categories for the selected axis. Each category in this list has separate settings. Which categories are available depends on the data type of the selected axis. See Formatting Settings for a full description of all possible options.

Note: These settings affect only the current visualization. For general information about formatting, see Formatting Overview.

See also:

Scatter Plot Properties

What is a Scatter Plot?

How to Use the Scatter Plot

Formatting Overview

Axis Formatting

Column Properties - Formatting

Scatter Plot Properties – Fonts

ScatterPlotProperties–Fonts.png

Option

Description

Settings for

Lists all items for which you can change the font settings. Click to select an item in the list to change the font settings for that text in the visualization. Press Ctrl and click on more items to change the settings for multiple items simultaneously.

Font

Specifies the font to use for the selected items.

Font style

Specifies the font style to use for the selected items.

Size

Specifies the font size to use for the selected items.

See also:

Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the Scatter Plot

What is a Scatter Plot?

Scatter Plot Properties – X-axis

ScatterPlotProperties–X-axis.png

Option

Description

Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy to be displayed on the X-axis.

Settings...

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog, where you can change the scale mode from categorical to continuous and vice versa, as well as changing the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

Range

 

   Min

Determines the lower value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently lowest value in the filtered data.

   Max

Determines the upper value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently highest value in the filtered data.

   Set to Current Range

Allows you to set the axis range to the currently filtered values.

 

   Include origin

Available for continuous axes only. Always includes the coordinates (0, 0) in the visualization, regardless of filtering.

   Show zoom slider

Shows a zoom slider that you can manually manipulate to view only the interesting markers in the scatter plot.

Show gridlines

Specifies whether or not vertical gridlines should be visible.

Scale labels

 

   Show labels

Specifies whether or not scale labels should be visible.

      Horizontally

Shows scale labels horizontally.

      Vertically

Shows scale labels vertically.

      Max number of labels

Select the check box to specify a maximum number of scale labels to be shown. Limiting the number of labels can improve readability on axis scales with many values.

Scale

 

   Log scale

Changes the scale from a linear scale to a logarithmic base 10 scale [log10 (x)].

   Reverse scale

Reverses the current sort order, so that the lowest value is displayed at the top of the scale.

See also:

Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the Scatter Plot

What is a Scatter Plot?

Scatter Plot Properties – Y-axis

One Y-axis with a single scale

ScatterPlotProperties–Y-axis1.png

Option

Description

Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy to be displayed on the Y-axis.

Settings...

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog where you can change the scale mode from categorical to continuous and vice versa, as well as changing the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

One axis with a single scale

Use this option if you want to show the values from a single column on the Y-axis or if you have multiple columns that can be presented using the same scale.

Multiple scales

Use this option to show two Y-axes (left and right) with two or more different scales. For example, use it if you want to display two columns of very different magnitudes in the same visualization.

Range

 

   Min

Determines the lower value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently lowest value in the filtered data.

   Max

Determines the upper value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently highest value in the filtered data.

   Set to Current Range

Allows you to set the axis range to the currently filtered values.

   Include origin

Available for continuous columns only. Always includes the coordinates (0, 0) in the visualization, regardless of filtering.

   Show zoom slider

Shows a zoom slider that you can manually manipulate to view only the interesting segments of the scatter plot.

Show gridlines

Specifies whether or not horizontal gridlines should be visible.

Scale labels

 

   Show labels

Specifies whether or not scale labels should be visible.

      Horizontally

Shows scale labels horizontally.

      Vertically

Shows scale labels vertically.

      Max number of labels

Select the check box to specify a maximum number of scale labels to be shown. Limiting the number of labels can improve readability on axis scales with many values.

Scale

 

   Log scale

Changes the scale from a linear scale to a logarithmic base 10 scale [log10 (x)].

   Reverse scale

Reverses the current sort order so that the lowest value is displayed at the top of the scale.

Multiple scales

ScatterPlotProperties–Y-axis2.png

Option

Description

Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy to be displayed on the Y-axis.

Settings...

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog where you can change the scale mode from categorical to continuous and vice versa, as well as changing the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

One axis with a single scale

Use this option if you want to show the values from a single column on the Y-axis or if you have multiple columns that can be presented using the same scale.

Multiple scales

Use this option to show two Y-axes (left and right) with two or more different scales. For example, use it if you want to display two columns with values of very different magnitudes in the same visualization.

Individual scaling

 

   For each color

Use this option to display one scale for each category used to color the markers by. For example, if you put two different columns on the Y-axis (for example, Oil Production and BNP), you can use the "(Column Names)" option to color by and click this radio button to display one scale for Oil Production and one for BNP.

Do not use this option if you need to color by a large number of different categories.

Note that you should apply true categorical coloring before using this option. If you use a continuous column on the color axis, you may end up with a different result than the expected. This applies even if the continuous color mode looks "categorical" at first sight.

   For each trellis panel

Use this option to display one scale for each trellis panel.

Zoom

 

   Show zoom slider

Shows a zoom slider that you can manually manipulate to view only the interesting segments of the scatter plot.

Show gridlines

Specifies whether or not horizontal gridlines should be visible.

Scale labels

 

   Show labels

Specifies whether or not scale labels should be visible. The scale labels are always displayed horizontally when multiple scales are shown.

   Horizontally

Shows scale labels horizontally.

Note: Only available for individual scaling for each trellis panel.

    Vertically

Shows scale labels vertically.

Note: Only available for individual scaling for each trellis panel.

      Max number of labels

Select the check box to specify a maximum number of scale labels to be shown. Limiting the number of labels can improve readability on axis scales with many values.

Individual scale settings

 

[Drop-down list]

Select the scale for which you wish to change the settings. Select All scales to change settings for all scales simultaneously.

Scale Range...

Opens the Scale Range dialog where you can specify the range of the selected scale, and also determine whether or not to include the origin (0, 0).

Position

Specifies which side of the visualization the scales should be positioned.

   Left Y-axis

Select this option to place the selected scale on the left-hand side of the visualization.

   Right Y-axis

Select this option to place the selected scale on the right-hand side of the visualization.

Log scale

Changes the scale from a linear scale to a logarithmic base 10 scale [log10 (x)].

Reverse scale

Reverses the current sort order, so that the lowest value is displayed at the top of the scale.

See also:

Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the Scatter Plot

What is a Scatter Plot?

Scatter Plot Properties – Colors

ScatterPlotProperties–Colors.png

Note: The color of marked items is changed under Edit > Document Properties.

Option

Description

Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy to color by.

Settings

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog where you can change the scale mode for the selected column or hierarchy from continuous to categorical and vice versa, as well as changing the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

Color mode

Specifies in which color mode to set up the color scheme. Which modes are available depends on whether the scale is in categorical or continuous mode. For columns in continuous scale mode, you can select one of the following color modes: Gradient, Segments, or Fixed. For columns in categorical scale mode, you can select either Categorical or Fixed color mode. To learn more about the color modes, see Color Modes Overview.

One scale per

Specifies whether there should be one separate scale per trellis panel for trellised scatter plots, or if one scale should apply to the entire visualization. Only applicable to columns in continuous scale mode.

ColorSchemeMenu.png

[Color Schemes menu]

Opens a menu where you can select an already existing color scheme and apply it to the visualization, or apply the currently open color scheme to another visualization in the analysis.

   From Visualization

Lets you select a color scheme from another visualization in the analysis. Only color schemes that are applicable to the current color scheme will be listed.

   Document Color Schemes

Lets you select a color scheme that has previously been saved within the analysis. Only color schemes that are applicable to the current color scheme will be listed. This menu option is only available if one or more document color schemes already exist.

   [Predefined color schemes]

Lists a number of predefined color schemes. Available for columns in continuous scale mode only. For a full description of the predefined color schemes, see Predefined Color Schemes.

Tip: To facilitate setting up a new color scheme, you can open a predefined color scheme with a similar appearance, and then adjust it to suit your needs.

   Open from Library...

Opens the Open from Library dialog where you can select a color scheme that has previously been saved to the library.

   Open from File...

Opens a dialog where you can select a previously saved color scheme.

   Save As

Lets you save a color scheme as a library item, a local file or a document color scheme.

Library Item – Opens the Save as Library Item dialog, where you can specify a location in the library and a file name to save the currently open color scheme for later reuse.

File – Opens a dialog where you can specify a location and a file name to save your currently open color scheme locally on your computer for later reuse.

Document Color Scheme – Opens the Save Document Color Scheme dialog, where you can specify a name and save the currently open color scheme for later reuse within the analysis.

   Apply to Visualizations...

Opens the Apply to Visualizations dialog where you can select other visualizations (within the analysis) that you want to apply the current color scheme to. Only visualizations with compatible color schemes are listed.

Note: If you apply a color scheme to a table, cross table, or heat map, the coloring will not take effect immediately. The color scheme will be added as an empty color scheme grouping, and you must select which columns or axis values to include in the grouping by opening the Edit Color Scheme Grouping dialog.

[Color scheme area]

The area in the lower part of the dialog shows the current color scheme. That is, the colors and values currently used in the visualization. You can modify color schemes in numerous ways to give the visualization the appearance you prefer. The color scheme area will look different, and have different available settings, depending on the characteristics of the column used to color the visualization by, as well as the selected color mode. To learn more about color schemes and color modes, see Color Schemes Overview and Color Modes Overview respectively.

Add Point

Available for continuous columns only. Adds a new anchor point to the color scheme.

Delete Point

Available for continuous columns only. Deletes the selected anchor point.

Add Rule...

Opens the Add Rule dialog where you can define a rule that functions as an exception to the rest of the defined color scheme. A rule has higher priority than the rest of the color scheme. For example, you can define a rule to give the top five items in your data a different color than the rest of the items. If you add many rules to a color scheme, the rules are prioritized from top to bottom. Which rule types are available depends on the characteristics of the column or hierarchy used to color the visualization by. See Details on Add/Edit Rule for full descriptions of the rule types.

Reset

Resets the color scheme to the one that was in effect when the visualization was created. Any added rules will be removed. Which color scheme should be used by default when you create a new visualization is defined in the Visualization page of the Options dialog.

See also:

Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the Scatter Plot

What is a Scatter Plot?

Scatter Plot Properties – Size

ScatterPlotProperties–Size1.png

Note: The settings on this page are not available when the scatter plot is set up with tiled markers. There are no size settings to apply to tiled markers since they have the same size by definition. Go to the Shape page to change marker shapes.

Option

Description

Marker size

Increases or decreases the overall size of all markers.

Size by

Specifies a column or hierarchy whose categories will determine the size of the markers.

The aggregation options on the drop-down menu are only available if the markers in the scatter plot have been aggregated by setting the Marker By option to something other than (Row Number).

Scale

Determines what scale to use for the size of the markers.

From min to max

Assigns the maximum marker size to the highest value, and the minimum marker size to the lowest value. For instance, if the minimum and maximum data values are -9 and 11 the marker sizes could be like the following:

ScatterPlotProperties–Size2.png

This mode is useful when you want to visualize differences.

  Min limit

  Max limit

The minimum and maximum limits that should be mapped to the marker size. By default, they are set to "Automatic". This means that the marker size will adapt during filtering. If the scale is set to "From min to max", the current minimum value will have the minimum marker size, and the current maximum value will have the maximum marker size. It is comparable to automatic zooming on the X or Y axes.

It is possible to lock the max limit and/or min limit to a specific value by selecting "Value" in the drop-down list and entering a value. Data values that are lower than the minimum value or higher than the maximum value will get the same size as the minimum and maximum value respectively. By specifying both a high and low value, the auto-scaling behavior is turned off.

From 0 to max absolute value

This mode is useful when you want to compare the magnitude of measures. By letting the value 0 map to marker size 0, and the maximum value to the maximum marker size, it is possible to compare the diameter of markers and say "a" is twice as big as "b". With this scale the values 50 and 100 would be rendered like this:

ScatterPlotProperties–Size3.png

Note: The size is scaled symmetrically around 0 with absolute numbers. That is, if your highest value is 10 and your lowest is -20, the size of the marker at 10 will be 50 percent of the maximum marker size.

  Max

The absolute limit that should be mapped to the marker size. By default, it is set to "Automatic". This means that the marker size will adapt during filtering. The value 0 will have the minimum marker size and the highest absolute value in the visualization will have the maximum marker size.

It is possible to lock this to a specific value by selecting "Value" in the drop-down list and entering a value. Data values that have a larger absolute value than the set value will get the same size as the maximum value.

See also:

Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the Scatter Plot

What is a Scatter Plot?

Scatter Plot Properties – Shape

ScatterPlotProperties–Shape.png

Option

Description

Fixed shape

Select this option to use the same, fixed shape on all markers. Select which shape to use from the Shape drop-down list under Shape definition.

     Shape

Defines which shape to use for all markers.

Shape by column values

Select this option to use different shapes for the categories in a specified column or hierarchy. Which column or hierarchy to use, as well as which shape should represent which category, is specified under Shape definition.

Note: A default set of shapes is used when automatically assigning shapes to categories. When there are more categories than available shapes in the default set, shapes will be recycled.

     Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy containing the categories you wish to present using different shapes.

     Settings...

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog where you can change the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

     Shape scheme

Lists the categories in the selected column or hierarchy, and the shapes that have been assigned to each of these categories.

Note: The set of shapes that is used by default in the scheme does not include all the available shapes. You can, however, always change to the shapes of your choice manually. Click on a shape in the scheme to display all the available shapes and make your selection.

Tiled markers

Select this option to display the markers as tiles. The markers will be rectangularly shaped, have the same size, and be displayed in a grid-like layout.

Note: When you use tiled markers the settings in the Size page will be disabled since the markers have the same size.

Pies

Select this option to use pies instead of markers.

Note: The Pies option is only available when the scatter plot is aggregated. Scatter plots are not aggregated by default. To enable the Pies alternative you need either to set Marker By to (None) or to use the column by which you want to aggregate on the Marker By selector.

      Sector size by

Determines the numeric column that should provide the sizes of the pie sectors.

Note: Which categories the pie sectors should represent is defined in the Colors page.

      Show in labels

Specifies what information to show in the labels for the pie sectors.

         Sector value

Displays the value of the sector. For example, sum of sales for apples, if the sector size is defined by sum of sales and the color is defined by fruit or vegetable type.

         Sector category

Displays the category defining the sector. For example, "apples", if the sector color is defined by fruit or vegetable type.

         Sector percentage

Displays labels showing the percentage of the total that each sector represents.

            Threshold

Excludes the labels for the sectors whose percentage falls below the specified threshold value.

            Decimals

Specifies the number of decimals to display for the percentage value. The number specified here will also affect the number of decimals shown for pie sectors in the tooltip.

      Label position

Specifies whether the labels will be located Inside or Outside the pie sectors.

      Sort sectors by size

Sorts the pie sectors by size.

See also:

Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the Scatter Plot

What is a Scatter Plot?

Scatter Plot Properties – Labels

ScatterPlotProperties–Labels1.png

Option

Description

Label by

Specifies the column or hierarchy whose values should be presented as labels in the visualization.

Show labels for

Determines whether to show labels on all markers (All), marked markers only (Marked rows), or not to show any labels at all (None).

Max number of labels

Specifies the maximum number of labels to be shown. If the number is smaller than the available number of markers, the labels will be equally distributed.

Note: This setting is not available when the markers are tiled. Go to the Shape page if you want to change marker shapes.

Center labels on items

Places the label right on top of the marker instead of drawing a line from the marker to the label, which is the default behavior. This can be a way to use your own images as markers.

Note: This setting is not available when the markers are tiled. Go to the Shape page if you want to change marker shapes.

Show empty labels

Shows labels that have no content.

Note: This setting is not available when the markers are tiled. Go to the Shape page if you want to change marker shapes.

Display options

These settings are used when you choose to display anything other than plain text in your labels. For example, the labels could contain web links or images.  

   Get content from

[Only visible if at least one virtual column producer is available.]

Your company may have set up some type of virtual column producers that can take the values from the selected column and transform them in one way or another to produce a desired output. For example, if you have access to TIBCO Spotfire Lead Discovery you can select Structure Column here, in order to show molecular structures from an information link in the labels.

For embedded images in the current data table, or when fetching data via a URL, you should leave this setting at (Selected column).

   Settings...

If the selected source has some settings available, you can reach those by clicking on the Settings button. For example, this is where you would specify which information link to retrieve structures from when using TIBCO Spotfire Lead Discovery.

   Show as

Allows you to decide how the data in the selected column should be interpreted.

For example, use Text for plain text labels. Use Image if there are binary images in your data that you want to use as labels. Use Link if the text should be interpreted as a web link. Use Image from URL if the image is picked from a web resource location. You may need to change the Link or Image from URL Renderer Settings by clicking on the Settings... button and modifying the link syntax so that it fits your current data. Once the URL to the image has been correctly specified you can see images in the labels.

ScatterPlotProperties–Labels2.png

Use Geometry if your data is a shape file and you want to show the geometrical shapes in the labels.

If a TIBCO Spotfire Lead Discovery structure column is used to label by, then you would select a renderer for displaying structure images here.

   Settings...

If the selected Show as method has some settings available that can be modified, you can reach them by clicking on the Settings button. For example, this could be Link Renderer Settings or Image from URL Renderer Settings for a web link, Geometry Renderer Settings or some structure renderer settings.

   Size

Available if the selected label output is some kind of image. Increases or decreases the size of the labels.

See also:

Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the Scatter Plot

What is a Scatter Plot?

Scatter Plot Properties – Tooltip

ScatterPlotProperties–Tooltip.png

Option

Description

Display the following values

Specifies what will be shown in the tooltip.

Add...

Opens the Add Tooltip Value dialog, where you can add the content from another column, hierarchy, or any custom expression to be shown in the tooltip. You can also use images in tooltips. See Highlighting in Visualizations for more information.

Edit...

Opens the Edit Tooltip Value dialog, where you can change the information to be shown in the tooltip.

Delete

Deletes the selected value from the list.

Move Up

Moves the selected value up in the list and, hence, up in the tooltip.

Move Down

Moves the selected value down in the list and, hence, down in the tooltip.

Tooltip format

 

   Value names and values

Shows the tooltip content in a format where the selected column name, hierarchy or custom expression is displayed. For example, Year: 2003, Type: Cucumber, etc.

   Visualization properties and values

Shows the tooltip content in a format where the visualization property for each value is displayed. For example, X: 2003, Color: Cucumber, etc.

See also:

Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the Scatter Plot

What is a Scatter Plot?

Scatter Plot Properties – Legend

ScatterPlotProperties–Legend.png

Option

Description

Show legend

Specifies whether or not the docked legend should be shown in the visualization.

Position

Specifies which side of the visualization the legend should be positioned: the right-hand side or the left-hand side.

Display the following legend items

Specifies what will be shown in the legend.

By clearing a check box you will completely hide that item from the legend. You can also select to show or hide parts of the legend information using the check boxes under Settings for the selected item in the list, see below.

Settings

Defines how the selected legend item should be displayed. The available options vary between legend items.

   Show title

Use this option to show or hide the title for the selected item. The title is typically what is displayed above an axis selector or similar:

CrossTableProperties–LegendInsert1.png

   Show axis selector

Select this option to show or hide the axis selector for the selected item.

CrossTableProperties–LegendInsert1.png

See also:

Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the Scatter Plot

What is a Scatter Plot?

Scatter Plot Properties – Trellis

ScatterPlotProperties–Trellis.png

Option

Description

Rows and columns

Splits the visualization into different panels for all categories in the selected column or hierarchy. The number of values in the specified column or hierarchy controls the number of panels to be displayed in each row, column, or page, respectively.

   Rows

A row with trellis panels will be created for each value in the selected column or hierarchy.

   Columns

A column with trellis panels will be created for each value in the selected column or hierarchy.

   Pages

A new page with trellis panels will be created for each value in the selected column or hierarchy. Scroll down in the visualization to see the next page.

Panels

Splits the visualization into different panels for all categories in the selected column or hierarchy, without binding any dimensions to either rows or columns. This means that the number of actual values in the column to split by does not control the number of shown rows or columns in any way.

The number of panels that should be visible on each page is instead specified using the Max number of rows and Max number of columns controls below.

   Split by

Specifies the column or hierarchy to define the categories by which the visualization should be split.

   Manual layout

Select the check box to manually specify the number of rows and columns that should be visible without scrolling. If the check box is cleared, the application will automatically specify the number of rows and columns.

   Max number of rows

Specifies the maximum number of panels that should be visible on each page.

   Max number of columns

Specifies the maximum number of panels that should be visible on each page.

Settings...

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog where you can change the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

See also:

Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the Scatter Plot

What is a Scatter Plot?

Scatter Plot Properties – Line Connection

ScatterPlotProperties–LineConnection.png

Option

Description

Draw a separate line per value in

Specifies the column or hierarchy containing the categories to use for line connection. Markers of the same category will be connected with each other to form a separate line. If no column or hierarchy is specified here, all markers will be connected with each other.

Order each line by

Specifies the order in which markers are connected. If no column or hierarchy is specified here, the markers will be ordered by row index (the order of the rows in the original data table).

Color

Specifies how colors will be assigned to the lines.

   Same as marker

Choose this option if you want the lines to have the same color as the markers they are a connection between. If a line connects markers with different colors, the color of the line will be a fusion of the two colors. For example, when a blue marker is connected with a yellow marker the line between them will be green.

   Custom

Choose this option if you want to use a single custom color for the lines. Click on the drop-down list to show the color selector where you can choose a different color.

Width

Specifies the width of the lines.

Place in

Select whether the lines should be placed in the foreground or background of the markers they are connecting.

Show arrows to indicate order

Specifies whether or not there should be arrows along the lines to indicate the order.

See also:

Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the Scatter Plot

What is a Scatter Plot?

Scatter Plot Properties – Marker By

ScatterPlotProperties–MarkerBy1.png

Option

Description

Show one marker for each

If you select (Row Number) here, then each row in the data table will be displayed as a separate marker in the visualization, even if several markers have identical values for the X-axis and Y-axis, and therefore are located at the exact same coordinates. These markers will be drawn on top of each other.

You can, however, select to combine markers (known as aggregation) so that each marker shows for example the sum of all rows that have something in common.

For example, if you have Continent on the X-axis and Sales on the Y-axis, then each individual sales number for each continent would be displayed as a marker (below).

ScatterPlotProperties–MarkerBy2.png

However, if you set Marker by = Year, then the sum of sales for each year will be displayed as a marker for each continent.

ScatterPlotProperties–MarkerBy3.png

Currently also split by the following properties

Displays information about what other properties currently contribute to a splitting of the markers.

See also:

Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the Scatter Plot

What is a Scatter Plot?

Scatter Plot Properties – Lines & Curves

ScatterPlotProperties–Lines&Curves.png

First part of the dialog

Option

Description

Visible lines and curves

Lists the currently added lines and curves. If a check mark is shown in the check box, then the line or curve is shown in the visualization. Clear the check box to hide a line or curve.

New lines or curves can be added to this list by clicking on the Add button; see below.

Add

Displays a menu where you can select which type of line or curve to add to the list of available lines and curves, and in some cases, opens a dialog where you can specify settings to use for that line or curve.

For more information about the different curve types, see Curve Fit Models.

Edit...

Opens a dialog where you can change the settings for the selected line or curve (when applicable).

Remove

Removes the selected line or curve from the list of available lines and curves.

More

 

   Duplicate

Duplicates the currently selected line or curve. This can be particularly useful if you want to add one static curve that is calculated on the whole data set (select the Update curve manually check box) and another one that is changed upon filtering (default).

   Export Curve Fit Result...

Opens a dialog where you can choose to export the curve fit result for the selected curve to a text file or to Microsoft® Excel®. The text file can be either a regular tab separated text file, or a Spotfire Text Data Format file, which contains a bit more information about the columns (types, etc.). The Excel file can be either an XLS file or an XLSX file.

Settings

Option

Description

Appearance

Determines the color, style and width of lines and curves, and the color, style and size of points.

Place in

Select whether to place the line, curve or point in the Foreground or Background of the visualization.

Transparency

Determines the transparency of the selected line, curve or point. That is, the degree to which the markers can be seen through it. The transparency is strongly connected to the color.

Label and Tooltip

Opens a dialog where you can determine what information to show in the label and/or tooltip for the selected line, curve or point.

Included in axis range

Sets the automatic zooming so that the line, curve or point is always shown, even if it lies far from the currently filtered values.

Update manually

Select the check box to "freeze" the line or curve so that it is not automatically recalculated upon filtering. You can update the line or curve by clicking the Update button below or by right-clicking in the visualization and selecting Update Lines and Curves and clicking on the one you want to update.

Note: Not applicable for points.

Update

When a line or curve has been specified to be manually updated, use this button to perform the update.

One per

Determines whether to show one line or curve per Color, Trellis panel, and/or Shape.

Note: Not applicable for points.

Note that you should apply true categorical coloring before using the color option. If you use a continuous column on the color axis, you may end up with a different result than the expected. This applies even if the continuous color mode looks "categorical" at first sight.

See also:

Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the Scatter Plot

What is a Scatter Plot?

Lines and Curves

Scatter Plot Properties – Error Bars

ScatterPlotProperties–ErrorBars.png

Option

Description

Visible error bars

Lists the numerical columns and measures that you can define error bars for in the visualization. If a check mark is shown in the check box, then error bars for that column or measure are visible in the visualization. Clear the check box to hide the error bars for a column or measure.

Note: No error bars will be visible in the visualization until an upper or lower error has been defined.

Settings

Shows the settings for the selected column or measure.

Note: If you use multiple Y-axes in the scatter plot you can define different error bars for the axes. However, all the defined vertical error bars will share the same settings for Color, Show end caps, and Include error bars in axis range. For example, you cannot set one vertical error bar to be blue, and another vertical error bar to be yellow in the same scatter plot. This also applies to using multiple measures on a Y-axis with a single scale.

   Upper error

Specifies the column and aggregation method, or custom expression to use for the upper error bars in the visualization.

Note: The chosen column or measure must have numerical values.

Note: For horizontal error bars in a scatter plot with non-reversed scales, the upper error refers to the error bar on the right hand side of the marker.

   Lower error

Specifies the column and aggregation method, or custom expression to use for the lower error bars in the visualization.

Note: The chosen column or measure must have numerical values.

Note: For horizontal error bars in a scatter plot with non-reversed scales, the lower error refers to the error bar on the left-hand side of the marker.

   Color

 

      Same as marker

Choose this option if you want an error bar to have the same color as the marker.

      Custom

Choose this option if you want to use a custom color for the error bars. Click on the drop-down list to show the palette and select a different color.

   Show end caps

Specifies whether or not orthogonal lines should be displayed at the end of the error bars.

   Include error bars in axis range

Sets the automatic zooming so that the error bars are always visible.

Note: The upper and lower errors refer to the underlying data. This means that if you use reversed scales in a visualization, the error bars will also be reversed. For example, for a scatter plot with reversed Y-axis, the upper error bar will be displayed below the marker. With reversed X-axis in the scatter plot, the upper error will be displayed on the left-hand side.

See also:

Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the Scatter Plot

What is a Scatter Plot?

Error Bars

3D Scatter Plot

What is a 3D Scatter Plot?


3D scatter plots are used to plot data points on three axes in the attempt to show the relationship between three variables. Each row in the data table is represented by a marker whose position depends on its values in the columns set on the X, Y, and Z axes.

A fourth variable can be set to correspond to the color or size of the markers, thus adding yet another dimension to the plot.

The relationship between different variables is called correlation. If the markers are close to making a straight line in any direction in the three-dimensional space of the 3D scatter plot, the correlation between the corresponding variables is high. If the markers are equally distributed in the 3D scatter plot, the correlation is low, or zero. However, even though a correlation may seem to be present, this might not always be the case. The variables could be related to some fourth variable, thus explaining their variation, or pure coincidence might cause an apparent correlation.

You can change how the 3D scatter plot is viewed by zooming in and out as well as rotating it by using the navigation controls located in the top right part of the visualization.

Note: The 3D scatter plot is not supported in TIBCO Spotfire Web Player. It is still possible to open an analysis with a 3D scatter plot in the web player, but the 3D scatter plot will not be shown.

Example:

In the 3D scatter plot below, sales, cost, and year are plotted against each other for a number of different products (colored by product).

Whatisa3DScatterPlot1.png

Each category can be shown separately using trellising. In the example below, the markers are colored by product, and trellised by category:

Whatisa3DScatterPlot2.png

The 3D scatter plot can also be used together with aggregation (for example, Sum or Average) by using the setting Marker By. In this case, the values for a certain category are bundled together to display a single marker for each category as seen in the example below. The aggregated markers can also be sized by the count of items within each category, or by any other column.

Example:

Whatisa3DScatterPlot3.png

Labels can be used in visualizations to identify and describe markers and the data associated with them.

Example:

In the 3D scatter plot below, labels show which category each of the marked markers belongs to.

Whatisa3DScatterPlot4.png

All visualizations can be set up to show data limited by one or more markings in other visualizations only (details visualizations). 3D scatter plots can also be limited by one or more filterings. Another alternative is to set up a 3D scatter plot without any filtering at all. See Limiting What is Shown in Visualizations for more information.

See also:

3D Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot

How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot


  • To apply coloring:

  1. In the Filters panel, click and hold down the left mouse button on the filter representing the column that you want to color by.

    Comment: Coloring is also available in the Visualization Properties dialog. The color of marked items is changed under Edit > Document Properties.

  2. Drag the filter to the center of the visualization.

    Response: Drop targets appear in the middle of the visualization.

  3. Release the mouse button on the Color target.

    Response: The markers are colored with one color for each category in the selected column.

    Comment: To learn more about coloring in Spotfire, see Coloring Overview.

  • To shape markers by a column:

  1. In the filters panel, click and hold down the left mouse button on the filter representing the column that you want to shape by.

    Comment: Shape is also available in the Properties dialog.

  2. Drag the filter to the center of the visualization.

    Response: Drop targets appear in the middle of the visualization.

  3. Release the mouse button on the Shape by target.

    Response: The markers are shaped with one shape for each category in the selected column.

    Comment: In the Shape page of the Properties dialog you can change the shape you want to use for each category.

  • To aggregate markers:

  1. Right-click in the 3D scatter plot to display the pop-up menu.

  2. Select Properties.

  3. Click to display the Marker By page.

  4. Select a column to group the markers by under Show one marker for each.
    Response: The markers are grouped so that a single marker is shown for each category in the selected column.
    Comment: If the Legend is visible, the Marker By property may also be changed there.

  • To create a new 3D scatter plot:

  1. Click on the New 3D Scatter Plot button on the toolbar,New3DScatterPlotButton.png.

    Comment: You can also select Insert > New Visualization > 3D Scatter Plot from the menu.

    Response: A first attempt to set up a suitable 3D scatter plot is made by the application.

  2. Adjust the 3D scatter plot to display the measures of your choice.

    Comment: For more information about how to change what to show on the three axes, see Column Selectors.

Zooming and navigating in the 3D scatter plot:

Located at the top right of the visualization are a number of buttons that you can use to zoom and navigate in the visualization.

Button

Shortcut

Description

3DScatterPlotButton1.png

Press and hold the Shift key and the right mouse button simultaneously while moving the mouse up.

Zoom in.

3DScatterPlotButton2.png

Press and hold the Shift key and the right mouse button simultaneously while moving the mouse down.

Zoom out.

3DScatterPlotButton3.png

Press and hold the Ctrl key and the right mouse button simultaneously while moving the mouse to the right.

Rotate right.

3DScatterPlotButton4.png

Press and hold the Ctrl key and the right mouse button simultaneously while moving the mouse to the left.

Rotate left.

3DScatterPlotButton5.png

Press and hold the Ctrl key and the right mouse button simultaneously while moving the mouse up.

Rotate up.

3DScatterPlotButton6.png

Press and hold the Ctrl key and the right mouse button simultaneously while moving the mouse down.

Rotate down.

3DScatterPlotButton7.png

 

Reset navigation.

You can also use the mouse wheel to zoom in or out. To reset zoom and navigation to the default values, click on the Reset Navigation button, or right-click in the visualization and select Reset Navigation.

Resizing markers in the 3D scatter plot:

You can use keyboard shortcuts to resize markers in the 3D scatter plot:

Shortcut

Description

Press and hold down the Ctrl key and the plus (+) key simultaneously until the markers have the desired size.

Increase size of markers.

Press and release the plus key repeatedly while pressing the Ctrl key.

Increase size of markers.

Press and hold the Ctrl key and the minus (-) key simultaneously.

Decrease size of markers.

Press and release the minus key repeatedly while pressing the Ctrl key.

Decrease size of markers.

Press and hold down the Ctrl key while rotating the mouse wheel.

Resize markers.

Yet another way to resize the markers is to open the Size page of the Properties dialog and use the slider control.

See also:

What is a 3D Scatter Plot?

3D Scatter Plot Properties

3D Scatter Plot Properties

3D Scatter Plot Properties

The 3D Scatter Plot Properties dialog consists of several pages:

  • General

  • Data

  • Appearance

  • Formatting

  • Fonts

  • X-axis

  • Y-axis

  • Z-axis

  • Colors

  • Size

  • Shape

  • Labels

  • Tooltip

  • Legend

  • Trellis

  • Marker By

  • To reach the 3D Scatter Plot Properties dialog:

  1. Right-click on the 3D scatter plot visualization.

  2. Select Properties from the pop-up menu.

    Comment: You can also click on the 3D scatter plot visualization to make it active and then select Edit > Visualization Properties.

See also:

What is a 3D Scatter Plot?

How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot

3D Scatter Plot Properties – General

3DScatterPlotProperties–General.png


Option

Description

Title

The title of the visualization.

Tip: Double-click on the title bar of the visualization for a shortcut to this field.

Show title bar

Specifies whether or not to show the visualization title.

Description

A description of the visualization. This description can optionally be shown in the legend and/or in the visualization.

Show description in visualization

Specifies whether or not to show the description in the visualization.

Note: You can open an analysis containing a 3D scatter plot in the web player, but you will be informed that the visualization cannot be shown in the web player.

See also:

3D Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot

What is a 3D Scatter Plot?

3D Scatter Plot Properties – Data

3DScatterPlotProperties–Data.png

Option

Description

Data table

Specifies the data table on which the visualization will work.

Marking

Specifies the marking (that is, the color and relationships to other marked items) that will be used to mark items in this visualization.

Limit data using markings

Lists the available markings that can be used to limit what is shown in this visualization. This means that the visualization only displays data that has been marked in other visualizations.

If more than one marking is selected, you can choose how the data in the markings should be combined.

New...

Opens the New Marking dialog where you can specify a new marking.

The color and name of a previously created marking is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Rows must be included in

Specifies how the data in the markings should be combined if you have selected to limit the data by more than one marking.

   All markings (AND)
  

Use this option if you want this visualization to show the intersection of the markings selected in Limit data using markings. This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in both markings. This visualization will then show only the data that has been marked using both of the selected markings.

   Any marking (OR)
   

Use this option if you want this visualization to show the union of the markings selected in Limit data using markings.

This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in either of the two markings. This visualization will then show data that has been marked using either of the selected markings.

Limit data using filterings

Defines how different filtering schemes in the analysis should affect this visualization.

Select Use the current filtering from the page if you want the visualization to always utilize the filtering scheme that is used on the page where the visualization is located. If you move the visualization to a new page, then the visualization will automatically start reacting on the filtering scheme that is used on the new page.

Select a specific filtering scheme from the list if you want the visualization to always use that filtering scheme. Moving the visualization to another page with a different filtering scheme will not affect this setting.

If you select to limit data using more than one filtering scheme, the intersection of the filterings will be used. This means that the visualization will show only the data that is made visible by all of the filtering schemes.

New...

Opens the New Filtering Scheme dialog where you can specify a new filtering scheme.

The color and name of a previously created filtering scheme is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

Limit data using expression

You can limit what data should be available for a certain visualization using an expression. If you have defined a limiting expression, it will be displayed here.

Edit...

Opens the Limit Data Using Expression dialog where you can define a boolean expression to use for limiting the data in this visualization.

See also:

3D Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot

What is a 3D Scatter Plot?

3D Scatter Plot Properties – Appearance

3DScatterPlotProperties–Appearance.png

Option

Description

Show navigation controls

Specifies whether or not to show the navigation controls in the visualization.

Jittering

Jittering is an option that displaces the visualization items randomly in the display window, thereby making overlapping markers visible.

   X

Specifies the amount of jittering to use in the X direction.

   Y

Specifies the amount of jittering to use in the Y direction.

   Z

Specifies the amount of jittering to use in the Z direction.

   Use the same amount of jittering for X, Y and Z

Select this check box to connect the jittering sliders in both directions to each other.

See also:

3D Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot

What is a 3D Scatter Plot?

3D Scatter Plot Properties – Formatting

3DScatterPlotProperties–Formatting.png

Option

Description

Axes

Displays which column and category are currently being used on each of the three axes in the 3D scatter plot. Click on the one you want to change the settings for. If the columns on the axes are of the same type, you can set formatting for two or all of the axes at the same time.

Reset

Resets the formatting for the selected axis values according to the settings defined on column level. If no column formatting has been set, axis formatting settings defined in the Options dialog will be used. If no settings have been specified in the Options dialog, the default settings for the visualization type will be used.

Category

Lists the available formatting categories for the selected axis. Each category in this list has separate settings. Which categories are available depends on the data type of the selected axis. See Formatting Settings for a full description of all possible options.

Note: These settings affect only the current visualization. For general information about formatting, see Formatting Overview.

See also:

3D Scatter Plot Properties

What is a 3D Scatter Plot?

How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot

Formatting Overview

Axis Formatting

Column Properties - Formatting

3D Scatter Plot Properties – Fonts

3DScatterPlotProperties–Fonts.png

Option

Description

Settings for

Lists all items for which you can change the font settings. Click to select an item in the list to change the font settings for that text in the visualization. Press Ctrl and click on more items to change the settings for multiple items simultaneously.

Font

Specifies the font to use for the selected items.

Font style

Specifies the font style to use for the selected items.

Size

Specifies the font size to use for the selected items.

See also:

3D Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot

What is a 3D Scatter Plot?

3D Scatter Plot Properties – X-axis

3DScatterPlotProperties–X-axis.png

Option

Description

Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy to be displayed on the X-axis.

Settings...

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog, where you can change the scale mode from categorical to continuous and vice versa, as well as changing the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

Range

 

   Min

Determines the lower value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently lowest value in the filtered data.

   Max

Determines the upper value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently highest value in the filtered data.

   Set to Current Range

Allows you to set the axis range to the currently filtered values.

   Include origin

Available for continuous axes only. Always includes the coordinates (0, 0) in the visualization, regardless of filtering.

   Show zoom slider

Shows a zoom slider that you can manually manipulate to view only the interesting markers in the 3D scatter plot.

   Show gridlines

Specifies whether or not gridlines should be visible on the X-axis.

Scale labels

 

   Show labels

Specifies whether or not scale labels should be visible.

      Horizontally

Specifies that scale labels are shown horizontally.

Note: In the 3D scatter plot you cannot change this setting.

      Vertically

This alternative is inactive, since it is not possible to change this setting in the 3D scatter plot.

Scale

 

   Log scale

Changes the scale from a linear scale to a logarithmic base 10 scale [log10 (x)].

   Reverse scale

Reverses the current sort order, so that the lowest value is displayed at the top of the scale.

See also:

3D Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot

What is a 3D Scatter Plot?

3D Scatter Plot Properties – Y-axis

3DScatterPlotProperties–Y-axis.png

Option

Description

Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy to be displayed on the Y-axis.

Settings...

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog where you can change the scale mode from categorical to continuous and vice versa, as well as changing the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

Range

 

   Min

Determines the lower value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently lowest value in the filtered data.

   Max

Determines the upper value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently highest value in the filtered data.

   Set to Current Range

Allows you to set the axis range to the currently filtered values.

   Include origin

Available for continuous columns only. Always includes the coordinates (0, 0) in the visualization, regardless of filtering.

   Show zoom slider

Shows a zoom slider that you can manually manipulate to view only the interesting segments of the 3D scatter plot.

   Show gridlines

Specifies whether or not gridlines should be visible on the Y-axis.

Scale labels

 

   Show labels

Specifies whether or not scale labels should be visible.

      Horizontally

Specifies that scale labels are shown horizontally.

Note: In the 3D scatter plot you cannot change this setting.

      Vertically

This alternative is inactive, since it is not possible to change this setting in the 3D scatter plot.

Scale

 

   Log scale

Changes the scale from a linear scale to a logarithmic base 10 scale [log10 (x)].

   Reverse scale

Reverses the current sort order so that the lowest value is displayed at the top of the scale.

See also:

3D Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot

What is a 3D Scatter Plot?

3D Scatter Plot Properties – Z-axis

3DScatterPlotProperties–Z-axis.png

Option

Description

Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy to be displayed on the Z-axis.

Settings...

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog where you can change the scale mode from categorical to continuous and vice versa, as well as changing the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

Range

 

   Min

Determines the lower value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently lowest value in the filtered data.

   Max

Determines the upper value of the axis range. Leave the field blank to automatically adjust the range to the currently highest value in the filtered data.

   Set to Current Range

Allows you to set the axis range to the currently filtered values.

   Include origin

Available for continuous columns only. Always includes the coordinates (0, 0) in the visualization, regardless of filtering.

   Show zoom slider

Shows a zoom slider that you can manually manipulate to view only the interesting segments of the 3D scatter plot.

   Show gridlines

Specifies whether or not horizontal gridlines should be visible.

Scale labels

 

   Show labels

Specifies whether or not scale labels should be visible.

      Horizontally

Specifies that scale labels are shown horizontally.

Note: In the 3D scatter plot you cannot change this setting.

      Vertically

This alternative is inactive, since it is not possible to change this setting in the 3D scatter plot.

Scale

 

   Log scale

Changes the scale from a linear scale to a logarithmic base 10 scale [log10 (x)].

   Reverse scale

Reverses the current sort order so that the lowest value is displayed at the top of the scale.

See also:

3D Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot

What is a 3D Scatter Plot?

3D Scatter Plot Properties – Colors

3DScatterPlotProperties–Colors.png

Option

Description

Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy to color by.

Settings

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog where you can change the scale mode for the selected column or hierarchy from continuous to categorical and vice versa, as well as changing the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

Color mode

Specifies in which color mode to set up the color scheme. Which modes are available depends on whether the scale is in categorical or continuous mode. For columns in continuous scale mode, you can select one of the following color modes: Gradient, Segments, or Fixed. For columns in categorical scale mode, you can select either Categorical or Fixed color mode. To learn more about the color modes, see Color Modes Overview.

One scale per

Specifies whether there should be one separate scale per trellis panel for trellised 3D scatter plots, or if one scale should apply to the entire visualization. Only applicable to columns in continuous scale mode.

ColorSchemeMenu.png

[Color Schemes menu]

Opens a menu where you can select an already existing color scheme and apply it to the visualization, or apply the currently open color scheme to another visualization in the analysis.

   From Visualization

Lets you select a color scheme from another visualization in the analysis. Only color schemes that are applicable to the current color scheme will be listed.

   Document Color Schemes

Lets you select a color scheme that has previously been saved within the analysis. Only color schemes that are applicable to the current color scheme will be listed. This menu option is only available if one or more document color schemes already exist.

   [Predefined color schemes]

Lists a number of predefined color schemes. Available for columns in continuous scale mode only. For a full description of the predefined color schemes, see Predefined Color Schemes.

Tip: To facilitate setting up a new color scheme, you can open a predefined color scheme with a similar appearance, and then adjust it to suit your needs.

   Open from Library...

Opens the Open from Library dialog where you can select a color scheme that has previously been saved to the library.

   Open from File...

Opens a dialog where you can select a previously saved color scheme.

   Save As

Lets you save a color scheme as a library item, a local file or a document color scheme.

Library Item – Opens the Save as Library Item dialog, where you can specify a location in the library and a file name to save the currently open color scheme for later reuse.

File – Opens a dialog where you can specify a location and a file name to save your currently open color scheme locally on your computer for later reuse.

Document Color Scheme – Opens the Save Document Color Scheme dialog, where you can specify a name and save the currently open color scheme for later reuse within the analysis.

   Apply to Visualizations...

Opens the Apply to Visualizations dialog where you can select other visualizations (within the analysis) that you want to apply the current color scheme to. Only visualizations with compatible color schemes are listed.

Note: If you apply a color scheme to a table, cross table, or heat map, the coloring will not take effect immediately. The color scheme will be added as an empty color scheme grouping, and you must select which columns or axis values to include in the grouping by opening the Edit Color Scheme Grouping dialog.

[Color scheme area]

The area in the lower part of the dialog shows the current color scheme. That is, the colors and values currently used in the visualization. You can modify color schemes in numerous ways to give the visualization the appearance you prefer. The color scheme area will look different, and have different available settings, depending on the characteristics of the column used to color the visualization by, as well as the selected color mode. To learn more about color schemes and color modes, see Color Schemes Overview and Color Modes Overview respectively.

Add Point

Available for continuous columns only. Adds a new anchor point to the color scheme.

Delete Point

Available for continuous columns only. Deletes the selected anchor point.

Add Rule...

Opens the Add Rule dialog where you can define a rule that functions as an exception to the rest of the defined color scheme. A rule has higher priority than the rest of the color scheme. For example, you can define a rule to give the top five items in your data a different color than the rest of the items. If you add many rules to a color scheme, the rules are prioritized from top to bottom. Which rule types are available depends on the characteristics of the column or hierarchy used to color the visualization by. See Details on Add/Edit Rule for full descriptions of the rule types.

Reset

Resets the color scheme to the one that was in effect when the visualization was created. Any added rules will be removed. Which color scheme should be used by default when you create a new visualization is defined in the Visualization page of the Options dialog.

Note: The color of marked items is changed under Edit > Document Properties.

See also:

3D Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot

What is a 3D Scatter Plot?

3D Scatter Plot Properties – Size

3DScatterPlotProperties–Size1.png

Option

Description

Marker size

Increases or decreases the overall size of all markers.

Size by

Specifies a column or hierarchy whose categories will determine the size of the markers.

The aggregation options on the drop-down menu are only available if the markers in the 3D scatter plot have been aggregated by setting the Marker By option to something other than (Row Number).

Scale

Determines what scale to use for the size of the markers.

From min to max

Assigns the maximum marker size to the highest value and the minimum marker size to the lowest value. For instance, if the minimum and maximum data values are -9 and 11 the marker sizes might look as follows:

3DScatterPlotProperties–Size2.png

This mode is useful when you want to visualize differences.

  Min limit

  Max limit

The minimum and maximum limits that should be mapped to the marker size. By default, they are set to "Automatic". This means that the marker size will adapt during filtering. If the scale is set to "From min to max", the current minimum value will have the minimum marker size, and the current maximum value will have the maximum marker size. It is comparable to automatic zooming on the axes.

It is possible to lock the max limit and/or min limit to a specific value by selecting "Value" in the drop-down list and entering a value. Data values that are lower than the minimum value or higher than the maximum value will get the same size as the minimum and maximum value respectively. By specifying both a high and low value, the auto-scaling behavior is turned off.

From 0 to max absolute value

This mode is useful when you want to compare the magnitude of measures. By letting the value 0 map to marker size 0, and the maximum value to the maximum marker size, it is possible to compare the diameter of markers and say "a" is twice as big as "b". With this scale the values 50 and 100 would be rendered like this:

3DScatterPlotProperties–Size3.png

Note: The size is scaled symmetrically around 0 with absolute numbers. That is, if your highest value is 10 and your lowest is -20, the size of the marker at 10 will be 50 percent of the maximum marker size.

  Max

The absolute limit that should be mapped to the marker size. By default it is set to "Automatic". This means that the marker size will adapt during filtering. The value 0 will have the minimum marker size and the highest absolute value in the visualization will have the maximum marker size.

It is possible to lock this to a specific value by selecting "Value" in the drop-down list and entering a value. Data values that have a larger absolute value than the set value will get the same size as the maximum value.

See also:

3D Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot

What is a 3D Scatter Plot?

3D Scatter Plot Properties – Shape

3DScatterPlotProperties–Shape.png

Option

Description

Fixed

Select this option to use the same, fixed shape on all markers. The shape is selected from the drop-down list.

By column

Select this option to use different shapes for the categories in a specified column or hierarchy. When there are more categories than available shapes, shapes will be recycled. Select which column to shape the markers by in the drop-down list.

     Settings...

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog where you can change the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

     Shape scheme

Click on a shape to change it to a different one.

See also:

3D Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot

What is a 3D Scatter Plot?

3D Scatter Plot Properties – Labels

3DScatterPlotProperties–Labels.png

Option

Description

Label by

Specifies the column or hierarchy whose values you want presented as labels in the visualization.

Show labels for

Determines whether to show labels on all markers (All), marked markers only (Marked rows), or not to show any labels at all (None).

Max number of labels

Specifies the maximum number of labels to be shown. If the number is smaller than the available number of markers, the labels will be equally distributed.

See also:

3D Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot

What is a 3D Scatter Plot?

3D Scatter Plot Properties – Tooltip

3DScatterPlotProperties–Tooltip.png

Option

Description

Display the following values

Specifies what will be shown in the tooltip.

Add...

Opens the Add Tooltip Value dialog, where you can add the content from another column, hierarchy, or any custom expression to be shown in the tooltip. You can also use images in tooltips. See Highlighting in Visualizations for more information.

Edit...

Opens the Edit Tooltip Value dialog, where you can change the information to be shown in the tooltip.

Delete

Deletes the selected value from the list.

Move Up

Moves the selected value up in the list and up in the tooltip.

Move Down

Moves the selected value down in the list and down in the tooltip.

Tooltip format

 

   Value names and values

Shows the tooltip content in a format where the selected column name, hierarchy or custom expression is displayed. For example, Year: 2003, Type: Cucumber, etc.

   Visualization properties and values

Shows the tooltip content in a format where the visualization property for each value is displayed. For example, X: 2003, Color: Cucumber, etc.

See also:

3D Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot

What is a 3D Scatter Plot?

3D Scatter Plot Properties – Legend

3DScatterPlotProperties–Legend.png.

Option

Description

Show legend

Specifies whether or not the docked legend should be shown in the visualization.

Position

Specifies which side of the visualization the legend should be positioned: the right-hand side or the left-hand side.

Display the following legend items

Specifies what will be shown in the legend.

By clearing a check box you will completely hide that item from the legend. You can also select to show or hide parts of the legend information using the check boxes under Settings for the selected item in the list, see below.

Settings

Defines how the selected legend item should be displayed. The available options vary between legend items.

   Show title

Use this option to show or hide the title for the selected item. The title is typically what is displayed above an axis selector or similar:

   Show axis selector

Select this option to show or hide the axis selector for the selected item.

See also:

3D Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot

What is a 3D Scatter Plot?

3D Scatter Plot Properties – Trellis

3DScatterPlotProperties–Trellis.png

Option

Description

Rows and columns

Splits the visualization into different panels for all categories in the selected column or hierarchy. The number of values in the specified column or hierarchy controls the number of panels to be displayed in each row, column, or page, respectively.

   Rows

A row with trellis panels will be created for each value in the selected column or hierarchy.

   Columns

A column with trellis panels will be created for each value in the selected column or hierarchy.

   Pages

A new page with trellis panels will be created for each value in the selected column or hierarchy. Scroll down in the visualization to see the next page.

Panels

Splits the visualization into different panels for all categories in the selected column or hierarchy without binding any dimensions to either rows or columns. This means that the number of actual values in the column to split by does not control the number of shown rows or columns in any way.

The number of panels that should be visible on each page is instead specified using the Max number of rows and Max number of columns controls below.

   Split by

Specifies the column or hierarchy to define the categories by which the visualization should be split.

   Manual layout

Select the check box to manually specify the number of rows and columns that should be visible without scrolling. If the check box is cleared, the application will automatically specify the number of rows and columns.

   Max number of rows

Specifies the maximum number of panels that should be visible on each page.

   Max number of columns

Specifies the maximum number of panels that should be visible on each page.

Settings...

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog where you can change the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

See also:

3D Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot

What is a 3D Scatter Plot?

3D Scatter Plot Properties – Marker By

3DScatterPlotProperties–MarkerBy1.png

Option

Description

Show one marker for each

If you select (Row Number) here, then each row in the data table will be displayed as a separate marker in the visualization even if several markers have identical values for the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis and are located at the exact same coordinates. These markers will be drawn on top of each other.

You can, however, select to combine markers (known as aggregating) so that each marker shows the sum of all rows that have something in common.

For example, if you have Continent on the X-axis, Year on the Y-axis and Sales on the Z-axis, then each individual sales number for each continent, and each individual year would be displayed as a marker (below).

3DScatterPlotProperties–MarkerBy2.png

However, if you set Marker By = Year, then the sum of sales for each year will be displayed as a marker for each continent.

3DScatterPlotProperties–MarkerBy3.png

Currently also split by the following properties

Displays information about what other properties currently contribute to a splitting of the markers.

See also:

3D Scatter Plot Properties

How to Use the 3D Scatter Plot

What is a 3D Scatter Plot?

Map Chart

What is a Map Chart?


There are three kinds of map charts in TIBCO Spotfire: maps with interactive shapes, maps with markers or pies, and image backgrounds with markers or pies.

Below is an example of a map chart with interactive shapes, where each shape represents a state in the United States. Each shape in the map is a separate item, and you can interact with those items the same way you do with items in any other visualization.

WhatisaMapChart1.png

The interactive shapes can be one of three geometry types: polygons, lines, or points. When polygons are used, as in the example above, the shapes constitute different areas in the map, and these areas will be filled with color. How to color the shapes is defined in the Colors page of the visualization properties, or in the legend. When lines or points are used, the interactive shapes are the actual lines or points. The color you define in the Colors page will be the color of the lines or points. Examples of when maps with lines as interactive shapes could be useful are maps showing highways or a street grid. Below is an example of a map chart with interactive shapes, where each shape represents a highway.

WhatisaMapChart2.png

Which geometry type is used in a map is defined in the map data before you load it into your analysis, and this cannot be changed in Spotfire. If the map data comes from an ESRI shape file, you can open the Properties tab of the Data Table Properties dialog to see which geometry type a map has if you are uncertain.

In a map with markers or pies, the map areas are not interactive. Instead, markers or pies are positioned in the different areas. In the example below, the map shows the same geographical area as in the first example, and is also divided into states. But instead of the states being interactive, a marker is placed in each of the states, and you can interact with the markers just as you do with markers in other visualizations.

WhatisaMapChart3.png

To set up a map with interactive shapes, or a map with markers or pies, you need a data table containing map data, such as from an ESRI shape file. You can use other types of sources than shape files, but that requires some manual configuration. To learn how to use a non-shape file, or to set up information links with map information, see Configuration of Geographical Data for Map Charts.

If you want the shapes in a map with interactive shapes to be colored by a data table other than the map data table, the two data tables must contain columns that can be matched to each other; State or City, for example. When you have set up a relation between the two data tables using these columns, you can color the shapes by a column in the other data table.

Similarly, if you want the markers in a map with markers or pies to be colored by another data table than the map data table, you must set up a relation between the two data tables. Or, if the data table for markers or pies has columns containing coordinates, you can use these to position the markers or pies in their correct locations on the map.

A third way to set up a map chart is to use a background image and then position markers or pies on top of that image. This works similarly to the map with markers or pies, but with the difference that you do not need to have map data in a data table in order to set it up. However, for the markers to be placed correctly in geographical positions, the data table must contain X and Y coordinates. Below is an example of a map chart where the background is a map image of a part of North America. On top of the background image are markers pointing out cities in the United States.

WhatisaMapChart4.png

You can zoom and pan in a map using the navigation controls to the right of the map. Click on the small arrow icon on the map chart title bar (shown on mouse over) to show or hide the navigation controls. The example below shows the same map chart as in the first example, but it has been zoomed in to show only some of the states. To learn more, see Zooming and navigating in the map chart.

WhatisaMapChart5.png

Labels can be used in the map chart to identify and describe markers or interactive shapes. In the example above, labels with the state names have been added to the map. Open the Labels page of the Map Chart Properties if you want to modify the labels settings. You can also move the labels to other positions in the map using drag and drop. To learn more about labels in different map types, see How to Use the Map Chart.

A map chart can be used to show other than geographical data. The example below displays different types of failures on a wafer, a semi-conductor material used to manufacture microchips.

WhatisaMapChart6.png

The background is an image representing the wafer. The markers in the visualization represent the chips on the wafer, and are placed on the background the same way they are placed on the actual wafer. The colors and labels indicate the six different types of manufacturing failures that have occurred on this wafer. Copying the actual layout of the wafer is a way to enhance the readability of the data. To be able to view the data this way, you need to use tiled markers. This means that all the markers have the same size, and are displayed in a grid-like layout. Go to the Shape page in the Map Chart Properties to change to tiled markers.

Note: If you use tiled markers, and the axes’ scales have a large number of values, then the markers may become too small to be seen. The reason for this is that the grid layout makes it necessary for each value on the scales to have a unique position, even if no marker is located at each of these allocated positions. Therefore, with a large number of values on the scale, the markers must become very small to fit in the grid.

All visualizations can be set up to show data limited by one or more markings in other visualizations only (details visualizations). Some visualizations can also be limited by one or more filterings, but this is not possible with the map chart.

See also:

How to Use the Map Chart

Map Chart Properties

Configuration of Geographical Data for Map Charts

How to Use the Map Chart


  • To create a new map chart:

  1. Click on the New Map Chart button on the toolbar, MapChartButton1.png.

    Comment: You can also select Insert > New Visualization > Map Chart from the menu.

    Response: A visualization area is created for the map chart.

  2. Right-click in the visualization to display the pop-up menu and select Properties.

    Response: The Properties dialog is displayed.

  3. Go to the Data page to select map type and to set up the map chart.

    Comment: See the appropriate section below to learn how to set up the different map types.

  • To set up a map with interactive shapes:

  1. Create a map chart.

  2. Right-click in the visualization to display the pop-up menu and select Properties.

    Response: The Properties dialog is displayed.

  3. Go to the Data page.

  4. Select Map with interactive shapes from the Map type drop-down list.

  5. Select a data table containing map data.

    Comment: If a map data table has not already been added, click Add... to open the Add Data Table dialog where you can browse for a data table to use, such as an ESRI shape file. If you are not using a shape file, some manual configuration is needed. To learn how to do this, see Configuration of Geographical Data for Map Charts.

    Response: The map is displayed in the visualization area.

  6. Under Related data table for coloring, select a data table of interest.

    Comment: To be able to color by another data table than the map data table, the other data table must be related to the map data table.

  7. If a relation has already been defined, the colored map is now displayed in the visualization. If no relation is defined, or if you want to edit an existing relation, continue to step 8.

  8. Click the Manage Relations... button.

    Response: The Manage Relations dialog is opened.

  9. To create a new relation, click on the New... button to open the New Relation dialog. To edit an existing relation, click on the Edit... button to open the Edit Relation dialog.

  10. In the Left data table drop-down list, select the same data table that you selected under Related data table for coloring.

  11. In the Right data table drop-down list, select the map data table.

  12. In the Left column and the Right column drop-down lists, select columns that make up a valid relation between the two data tables. For instance, columns in both data tables describing the same regions, such as state or country names.

  13. Click OK.

  14. Click OK in the Manage Relations dialog.

    Response: The map is colored by a column in the related data table. To change which column to color the map by, go to the Colors page.

    Comment: To learn more about coloring in Spotfire, see Coloring Overview.

  15. To change the appearance of the map, go to the Appearance page.

  • To set up a map with markers or pies:

  1. Create a map chart.

  2. Right-click in the visualization to display the pop-up menu and select Properties.

    Response: The Properties dialog is displayed.

  3. Go to the Data page.

  4. Select Map with markers or pies from the Map type drop-down list.

  5. Select a data table containing map data.

    Comment: If a map data table has not already been added, click Add... to open the Add Data Table dialog where you can browse for a data table to use, such as an ESRI shape file.

    Response: The map is displayed in the visualization area.

  6. Under Data table for markers or pies, select a data table of interest.

  7. Under Draw markers or pies using, select whether to use Relation or Coordinate columns to match the map data table to the data table for markers or pies.

    Comment: If you want to use a relation, you must set up a relation to make the Relation option available.

  8. To set up a relation, or to edit an existing relation, go through steps 9 to 15. To use an existing relation, go to step 16. To use coordinate columns, go through steps 17 to 19.

  9. Click the Manage Relations... button.

    Response: The Manage Relations dialog is opened.

  10. To create a new relation, click on the New... button to open the New Relation dialog. To edit an existing relation, click on the Edit... button to open the Edit Relation dialog.

  11. In the Left data table drop-down list, select the same data table that you selected under Related data table for coloring.

  12. In the Right data table drop-down list, select the map data table.

  13. In the Left column and the Right column drop-down lists, select columns that make up a valid relation between the two data tables. For instance, columns in both data tables describing the same regions, such as state or country names.

  14. Click OK.

  15. Click OK in the Manage Relations dialog.

  16. Select the Relation radio button.

    Response: Markers or pies are displayed in the map according to the positions given in the specified relation.

  17. Select the Coordinate columns radio button.

  18. In the X column drop-down list, select the X coordinate column.

  19. In the Y column drop-down list, select the Y coordinate column.

    Response: Markers or pies are displayed in the map according to the positions given in the coordinate columns.

  20. To change from markers to pies, or vice versa, go to the Shape page. To change the appearance of the map, go to the Appearance page.

  • To set up a map using a background image with markers or pies:

  1. Create a map chart.

  2. Right-click in the visualization to display the pop-up menu and select Properties.

    Response: The Properties dialog is displayed.

  3. Go to the Data page.

  4. Select Background image with markers or pies from the Map type drop-down list.

  5. Click on Browse... to locate the interesting image file.

    Comment: You can use a vector file (EMF, WMF) or an image file (BMP, GIF, TIFF, JPG, PNG, etc.).

    Response: The image is shown in the visualization area.

  6. Under Data table for markers or pies, select a data table.

  7. Select X column and Y column from the drop-down lists.

  8. Click on the Position Settings... button to open the Position Settings dialog where you can adjust the image position relative to the data in the X and Y columns.

    Comment: If you do not have the exact coordinates of the map limits, you can locate a few known landmarks in the map and adjust the X and Y High and Low values until the corresponding markers are positioned on the correct landmarks.

  9. When done, click OK.

  10. To change from markers to pies, or vice versa, go to the Shape page.

Zooming and navigating in the map chart:

Located at the top right of the visualization are a number of buttons that you can use to zoom and navigate in the visualization.

Button

Shortcut

Description

MapChartButton1.png

Press and hold the Shift key and the right mouse button simultaneously while moving the mouse up.

Zoom in.

MapChartButton2.png

Press and hold the Shift key and the right mouse button simultaneously while moving the mouse down.

Zoom out.

 

Press and hold the Shift + Ctrl + Alt keys and the left mouse button simultaneously, while drawing a rectangle with the mouse pointer.

Zoom in on a rectangular area of a map.

MapChartButton3.png

Press and hold the Ctrl key and the right mouse button simultaneously to grab the map and move it in any direction.

Pan right.

MapChartButton4.png

-"-

Pan left.

MapChartButton5.png

-"-

Pan up.

MapChartButton6.png

-"-

Pan down.

MapChartButton7.png

 

Reset navigation.

You can also use the mouse wheel to zoom in or out.  To reset navigation to the default values, click on the Reset Navigation button or right-click in the visualization and select Reset Navigation.

Resizing markers and pies in the map chart:

You can use keyboard shortcuts to resize markers and pies in a map chart:

Shortcut

Description

Press and hold down the Ctrl key and the plus (+) key simultaneously until the markers or pies have the desired size.

Increase size of markers or pies.

Press and release the plus key repeatedly while pressing the Ctrl key.

Increase size of markers or pies.

Press and hold the Ctrl key and the minus (-) key simultaneously.

Decrease size of markers or pies.

Press and release the minus key repeatedly while pressing the Ctrl key.

Decrease size of markers or pies.

Press and hold down the Ctrl key while rotating the mouse wheel.

Resize markers or pies.

 You can also go into the Size page of the Properties dialog and use the slider control.

Labels in different map types

Labels can be used in any map type to identify and describe the markers, pies, or interactive shapes. Most settings related to labels are defined in the Labels page of the Map Chart Properties. In maps with markers or pies, you can click on a label to mark the corresponding marker, and mouseover a label to highlight both the label and the marker. In a map with a large amount of labels it can sometimes be useful to move the labels to other positions to make sure as many of the labels as possible are visible. This is done using drag and drop, and works slightly differently depending on the map type, as described below. In maps with interactive shapes, you can hover with the mouse pointer over a map shape to view its corresponding label if the label is hidden due to lack of space.

  • To add labels to a map chart:

  1. Right-click in the visualization to display the pop-up menu and select Properties.

    Response: The Properties dialog is displayed.

  2. Go to the Labels page.

  3. Select the column to Label by.

    Response: Labels are displayed in the map.

    Comment: When a map with interactive shapes is used, the column to label by must always come from the same data table as the column to color by. The data table used for coloring is specified on the Data page.

  4. Specify whether to Show labels for All, Marked rows or None.

    Comment: If the map chart uses markers or pies you can change the Max number of labels, or select one or more of the check boxes to Center labels on items or Show empty labels. You can also specify Display options and get content from an image column, another source or apply some kind of transformation (if any transformations are available).

  • To move labels in a map chart with interactive shapes:

  1. Right-click in the visualization to display the pop-up menu and select Edit Label Positions.

    Response: The label editing is enabled.

  2. Click on the label you wish to move and drag it to its new position.

  3. When you are done, right-click on the visualization and select Edit Label Positions again to leave the label editing mode.

    Comment: You can get all original label positions back by right-clicking and selecting Reset Label Positions.

  • To move labels in a map with markers or pies:

  1. Click on the label you wish to move and drag it to a new position.

  2. Response: The label is moved to the new position.

    Comment: You can get all original label positions back by right-clicking and selecting Reset Label Positions.

    Comment: When tiled markers are used, labels cannot be moved to other positions since they are always centered and displayed directly on the markers.

See also:

What is a Map Chart?

Map Chart Properties

Map Chart Properties

Map Chart Properties

The Map Chart Properties dialog consists of several pages:

  • General

  • Data

  • Appearance

  • Fonts

  • Colors

  • Size

  • Shape

  • Labels

  • Tooltip

  • Legend

  • Trellis

  • Line Connection

  • Marker By

  • To reach the Map Chart Properties dialog:

  1. Right-click on the map chart visualization.

  2. Select Properties from the pop-up menu.

    Comment: You can also click on the map chart visualization to make it active and then select Edit > Visualization Properties.

See also:

What is a Map Chart?

How to Use the Map Chart

Map Chart Properties – General

MapChartProperties–Data1.png


Option

Description

Title

The title of the visualization.

Tip: Double-click on the title bar of the visualization for a shortcut to this field.

Show title bar

Specifies whether or not to show the visualization title.

Description

A description of the visualization. This description can optionally be shown in the legend and/or in the visualization.

Show description in visualization

Specifies whether or not to show the description in the visualization.

See also:

Map Chart Properties

How to Use the Map Chart

What is a Map Chart?

Map Chart Properties – Data

There are three types of maps in Spotfire and depending on the map you choose, the settings you need to define will be different.

Map with interactive shapes

MapChartProperties–Data1.png

Option

Description

Map type

Decides what kind of map to use. Depending on which map type you choose, the available map settings will be different.

Map settings

The available settings for the chosen map type.

   Map data table

Specifies the data table to draw the map from.

   Add...

Opens a dialog where you can select the data table of interest. For example, an ESRI shape file (.SHP).

   Auto-zoom

If the check box is selected, the visualization is automatically zoomed in on the filtered shapes.

Note: To be able to zoom and pan using the navigation controls or keyboard shortcuts, Auto-zoom must be deselected.

   Related data table for coloring

Specifies the data table that the coloring of the map should be based on. This is also the data table from which information will be shown in the Details-on-Demand window when shapes are marked in the map.

Note: You can use the map data table to color by, but to color by another data table, a valid relation must exist between the two data tables.

   Manage Relations...

Opens the Manage Relations dialog where you can add, edit or remove relations between data tables.

Marking Settings

 

   Marking

Specifies the marking (the color and relationships to other marked items) that will be used to mark items in this visualization.

   New...

Opens the New Marking dialog where you can specify a new marking.

The color of a previously created marking is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

   Limit data shown in visualization using markings

Lists the available markings that can be used to limit what is shown in this visualization. This means that the visualization only displays data that has been marked in other visualizations.

If more than one marking is selected, the resulting visualization shows the intersection of the markings.

This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in both markings. Create a third visualization and set the data to be limited by both markings to see the common markers.

Note: To set up a map chart using a non-shape file, see Configuration of Geographical Data for Map Charts.

Map with markers or pies

MapChartProperties–Data2.png

Option

Description

Map type

Decides what kind of map to use. Depending on which map type you choose, the available map settings will be different.

Map settings

The available settings for the chosen map type.

   Map data table

Specifies the data table to draw the map background from.

   Add...

Opens a dialog where you can select the data table of interest.

   Data table for markers or pies

Specifies the data table that the markers or pies in the map chart should be based on. This is also the data table from which information will be shown in the Details-on-Demand window when the markers or pies are marked in the map.

   Manage relations...

Opens the Manage Relations dialog where you can add, edit or remove relations between data tables.

   Draw markers or pies using

Decides whether the markers or pies in the map chart should be drawn by using a relation between columns in two data tables or by specifying coordinate columns.

      Relation

Select this option to use an already defined relation between columns in the map data table and the data table for markers or pies.

      Coordinate columns

Use this option to specify columns in the data table that should be used on the X-axis and the Y-axis of the visualization.

   Auto-zoom

If the check box is selected, the visualization is automatically zoomed in on the filtered values.

Note: To be able to zoom and pan using the navigation controls or keyboard shortcuts, Auto-zoom must be deselected.

Marking Settings

 

   Marking

Specifies the marking (the color and relationships to other marked items) that will be used to mark items in this visualization.

   New...

Opens the New Marking dialog where you can specify a new marking.

The color of a previously created marking is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

   Limit data shown in visualization using markings

Lists the available markings that can be used to limit what is shown in this visualization. This means that the visualization only displays data that has been marked in other visualizations.

If more than one marking is selected, the resulting visualization shows the intersection of the markings.

This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in both markings. Create a third visualization and set the data to be limited by both markings to see the common markers.

Background image with markers or pies

MapChartProperties–Data3.png

Option

Description

Map type

Decides what kind of map to use. Depending on which map type you choose, the available map settings will be different.

Map settings

The available settings for the chosen map type.

   Background image file

Specifies the image to use as a background. Both vector files (EMF, WMF) and image files (BMP, GIF, PNG, etc.) can be used.

   Browse...

Opens a dialog where you can select the file of interest.

   Position settings

Opens a dialog where you can specify the location of the markers or pies relative to the position of the background image.

   Data table for markers or pies

Specifies the data table that the markers or pies in the map chart should be based on. This is also the data table from which information will be shown in the Details-on-Demand window when the markers or pies are marked in the map.

   X column

Use this option to specify a column in the data table that should be used on the X-axis of the visualization.

   Y column

Use this option to specify a column in the data table that should be used on the Y-axis of the visualization.

   Auto-zoom

If the check box is selected, the visualization is automatically zoomed in on the filtered values.

Note: To be able to zoom and pan using the navigation controls or keyboard shortcuts, Auto-zoom must be deselected.

Marking Settings

 

   Marking

Specifies the marking (the color and relationships to other marked items) that will be used to mark items in this visualization.

   New...

Opens the New Marking dialog where you can specify a new marking.

The color of a previously created marking is edited in the Document Properties dialog.

   Limit data shown in visualization using markings

Lists the available markings that can be used to limit what is shown in this visualization. This means that the visualization only displays data that has been marked in other visualizations.

If more than one marking is selected, the resulting visualization shows the intersection of the markings.

This can be used if you have two visualizations with different markings and want to see which markers are present in both markings. Create a third visualization and set the data to be limited by both markings to see the common markers.

See also:

Map Chart Properties

How to Use the Map Chart

What is a Map Chart?

Configuration of Geographical Data for Map Charts

Map Chart Properties – Appearance

MapChartProperties–Appearance.png

Option

Description

Show navigation controls

Specifies whether or not the navigation controls should be visible in the visualization.

Map

Settings to apply to the map.

Note: These settings are disabled for map charts using a background image with markers or pies.

   Fill color

Defines which color to fill the different areas of the map with. This is only available for maps with markers or pies with polygon shapes.

   Border color

Defines the color to use for the border surrounding the areas in the map. This is available for maps with interactive shapes, and maps with markers or pies.

Note: In a map with markers or pies where the map consists of lines or points rather than areas, the color to apply to them is decided by the border color as well.

   Border weight

Defines the thickness of the borders of the areas in the map. If the map consists of lines rather than areas, the border weight decides the line thickness. If the map consists of points, the border weight decides their sizes. Border weight is available for maps with interactive shapes, and maps with markers or pies.

Markers or pies

Settings to apply to markers or pies in the visualization.

Note: These settings are disabled for maps with interactive shapes, since no markers or pies are available in those maps.

   Jittering

Jittering is an option that displaces the visualization items randomly in the display window, thereby making overlapping records visible.

      X

Specifies the amount of jittering to use in the horizontal direction.

      Y

Specifies the amount of jittering to use in the vertical direction.

      Use the same amount of jittering for both X and Y

Select this check box to connect the jittering sliders in both directions to each other.

See also:

Map Chart Properties

How to Use the Map Chart

What is a Map Chart?

Map Chart Properties – Fonts

MapChartProperties–Fonts.png

Option

Description

Settings for

Lists all items for which you can change the font settings. Click to select an item in the list to change the font settings for that text in the visualization. Press Ctrl and click on more items to change the settings for multiple items simultaneously.

Font

Specifies the font to use for the selected items.

Font style

Specifies the font style to use for the selected items.

Size

Specifies the font size to use for the selected items.

See also:

Map Chart Properties

How to Use the Map Chart

What is a Map Chart?

Map Chart Properties – Colors

MapChartProperties–Colors.png

Note: The settings on this page concern the related data table for coloring when you use a map with interactive shapes. When you use a map or image background with markers or pies, the settings on this page concern the data table for markers or pies.

Note: The color of marked items is changed under Edit > Document Properties.

Option

Description

Columns

Specifies the column or hierarchy to color by.

Settings

Opens the Advanced Settings dialog where you can change the scale mode for the selected column or hierarchy from continuous to categorical and vice versa, as well as changing the category mode to determine which combinations to show.

Color mode

Specifies in which color mode to set up the color scheme. Which modes are available depends on whether the scale is in categorical or continuous mode. For columns in continuous scale mode, you can select one of the following color modes: Gradient, Segments, Fixed, or Unique values. For columns in categorical scale mode, you can select either Categorical or Fixed color mode. To learn more about the color modes, see Color Modes Overview.

One scale per

Specifies whether there should be one separate scale per trellis panel for trellised map charts, or if one scale should apply to the entire visualization. Only applicable to columns in continuous scale mode.

ColorSchemeMenu.png

[Color Schemes menu]

Opens a menu where you can select an already existing color scheme and apply it to the visualization, or apply the currently open color scheme to another visualization in the analysis.

   From Visualization

Lets you select a color scheme from another visualization in the analysis. Only color schemes that are applicable to the current color scheme will be listed.

   Document Color Schemes

Lets you select a color scheme that has previously been saved within the analysis. Only color schemes that are applicable to the current color scheme will be listed. This menu option is only available if one or more document color schemes already exist.

   [Predefined color schemes]

Lists a number of predefined color schemes. Available for columns in continuous scale mode only. For a full description of the predefined color schemes, see Predefined Color Schemes.

Tip: To facilitate setting up a new color scheme, you can open a predefined color scheme with a similar appearance, and then adjust it to suit your needs.

   Open from Library...

Opens the Open from Library dialog where you can select a color scheme that has previously been saved to the library.

   Open from File...

Opens a dialog where you can select a previously saved color scheme.

   Save As

Lets you save a color scheme as a library item, a local file or a document color scheme.

Library Item – Opens the Save as Library Item dialog, where you can specify a location in the library and a file name to save the currently open color scheme for later reuse.

File – Opens a dialog where you can specify a location and a file name to save your currently open color scheme locally on your computer for later reuse.

Document Color Scheme – Opens the Save Document Color Scheme dialog, where you can specify a name and save the currently open color scheme for later reuse within the analysis.

   Apply to Visualizations...

Opens the Apply to Visualizations dialog where you can select other visualizations (within the analysis) that you want to apply the current color scheme to. Only visualizations with compatible color schemes are listed.

Note: If you apply a color scheme to a table, cross table, or heat map, the coloring will not take effect immediately. The color scheme will be added as an empty color scheme grouping, and you must select which columns or axis values to include in the grouping by opening the Edit Color Scheme Grouping dialog.

[Color scheme area]

The area in the lower part of the dialog shows the current color scheme. That is, the colors and values currently used in the visualization. You can modify color schemes in numerous ways to give the visualization the appearance you prefer. The color scheme area will look different, and have different available settings, depending on the characteristics of the column used to color the visualization by, as well as the selected color mode. To learn more about color schemes and color modes, see Color Schemes Overview and Color Modes Overview respectively.

Add Point

Available for continuous columns only. Adds a new anchor point to the color scheme.

Delete Point

Available for continuous columns only. Deletes the selected anchor point.

Add Rule...

Opens the Add Rule dialog where you can define a rule that functions as an exception to the rest of the defined color scheme. A rule has higher priority than the rest of the color scheme. For example, you can define a rule to give the top five items in your data a different color than the rest of the items. If you add many rules to a color scheme, the rules are prioritized from top to bottom. Which rule types are available depends on the characteristics of the column or hierarchy used to color the visualization by. See Details on Add/Edit Rule for full descriptions of the rule types.

Reset

Resets the color scheme to the one that was in effect when the visualization was created. Any added rules will be removed. Which color scheme should be used by default when you create a new visualization is defined in the Visualization page of the Options dialog.

See also:

Map Chart Properties

How to Use the Map Chart

What is a Map Chart?

Map Chart Properties – Size

MapChartProperties–Size1.png

Note: The settings on this page are not available for maps with interactive shapes, or when the map chart is set up with tiled markers. Maps with interactive shapes do not have any markers to apply any size settings to, and tiled markers have the same size by definition. To change map type, go to the Data page. To change marker shapes, go to the Shape page.

Option

Description

Marker size

Increases or decreases the overall size of all markers.

Size by

Specifies a column or hierarchy whose categories will determine the size of the markers.

The aggregation options on the drop-down menu are only available if the markers in the map chart have been aggregated by setting the Marker By option to something other than (Row Number).

Scale

Determines the scale to use for the size of the markers.

From min to max

Assigns the maximum marker size to the highest value, and the minimum marker size to the lowest value. For instance, if the minimum and maximum data values are -9 and 11 respectively, the marker sizes could be like the following:

MapChartProperties–Size2.png

This mode is useful when you want to visualize differences.

  Min limit

  Max limit

The minimum and maximum limits that should be mapped to the marker size. By default, they are set to "Automatic". This means that the marker size will adapt during filtering. If the scale is set to "From min to max", the current minimum value will have the minimum marker size, and the current maximum value will have the maximum marker size. It is comparable to automatic zooming on the X or Y axes.

It is possible to lock the max limit and/or min limit to a specific value by selecting "Value" in the drop-down list and entering a value. Data values that are lower than the minimum value or higher than the maximum valu